Etacs Mitsubishi 5100 54a

54A-1
GROUP 54A
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-4 COMBINATION METER . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-12

GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-4 SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-12
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-4 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-13
FLUID LEVEL AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY  DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-15
CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-4 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART . . 54A-18
BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-5 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE 
BATTERY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-5 PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-19
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-7 TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART . . . . . . . . . . 54A-35
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-36
IGNITION SWITCH* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-8 SERVICE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-50
SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-8 ACTUATOR TEST TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-51
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-8 SPECIAL FUNCTION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-51
STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC  CHECK AT COMBINATION METER 
TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-8 TERMINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-51
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART. . . . . . . . . . 54A-8 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-53
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-9
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-10
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-12 Continued on next page
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. WASH HANDS
AFTER HANDLING.
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES
WARNING
 Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to
personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver and
passenger (from rendering the SRS inoperative).
 Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an
authorized MITSUBISHI dealer.
 MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B - Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any
SRS-related component.
NOTE
The SRS includes the following components: SRS air bag control unit, SRS warning light, front impact sensors, air bag module,
side-airbag module, curtain air bag module, side impact sensors, seat belt pre-tensioners, clock spring, and interconnecting
wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance)
are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
54A-2
COMBINATION METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-61 HIGH-MOUNTED STOPLIGHT. . . . . . 54A-132

HEADLIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-62
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-62 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . 54A-133
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-63 DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-133
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-65 TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART . . . . . . . . . . 54A-133
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART . . 54A-67 SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-133
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE  REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-135
PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-68
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART. . . . . . . . . . 54A-74 HAZARD WARNING LIGHT 
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-75 SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-136
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-93 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-136
HEADLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-98 DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-138
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-99 TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART . . . . . . . . . . 54A-138
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT . . . . . . 54A-100 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-140
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-100 INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-140
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-102
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART. . . . . . . . . . 54A-102 HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-141
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-102 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-141
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-108 INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-142
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL 
AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-109 REAR VIEW CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-142
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-142
FRONT FOG LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-110
DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-143
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-110
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART . . . . . . . . . . 54A-143
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-111
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-113
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART. . . . . . . . . . 54A-113
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-113 ACCESSORY SOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-146
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-120 COLUMN SWITCH* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-147
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-147
SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LIGHT . . . . . . . 54A-121 DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-149
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE 
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-151
DOME LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-123 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-152
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-125
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART. . . . . . . . . . 54A-125 RADIO AND CD PLAYER . . . . . . . . . 54A-154
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-125 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-154
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-129 DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-155
DOME LIGHT REMOVAL AND  TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART . . . . . . . . . . 54A-156
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-131
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT 
Continued on next page
54A-3
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-156 ETACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-213

RADIO AND CD PLAYER REMOVAL  SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-213
AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-163 DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-215
USB CABLE REMOVAL AND 
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART . . 54A-218
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-163
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-219
MMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-165
SERVICE DATA INSPECTION 
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-165 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-233
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-165 CHECK CHART FOR TROUBLE 
CHECK CHART FOR TROUBLE  SYMPTOMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-237
SYMPTOMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-168 SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-237
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-168 CHECK TROUBLE BY USING THE 
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-179 INPUT SIGNAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-239
MAIN UNIT TERMINAL VOLTAGE. . . . . . . 54A-184 INPUT SIGNAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . 54A-240
MULTIVISION DISPLAY REMOVAL AND  CHECK AT ECU TERMINAL. . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-253
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-186 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-256
USB CABLE REMOVAL AND  ETACS-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-260
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-187
PANIC ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-261
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO 
DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-261
REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH . . . . . 54A-187
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART . . . . . . . . . . 54A-261
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-187
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-155
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO REMOTE 
DEFOGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-263
CONTROL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-191
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-263
HANDS-FREE INTERFACE  DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-265
SYSTEM <VEHICLES WITH  SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-266
HANDS FREE-ECU> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-192 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-270
MMCS DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-192 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-271
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-179 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 
HANDS FREE ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-207
<VEHICLES WITHOUT KOS> . . . . . . 54A-272
MICROPHONE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-208 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-272
STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL  DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-274

SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-208 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART . . 54A-277
SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-209 PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-277
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-209 TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART . . . . . . . . . . 54A-286
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 54A-211 SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-286
DATA LIST REFERENCE TABLE . . . . . . . . 54A-290
ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-212 CHECK ETACS-ECU 
(IMMOBILIZER-ECU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-290
54A-4 CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
BATTERY
BATTERY
GENERAL INFORMATION
M1541000100807
Item Specification
55D23L
Voltage V 12
Capacity (5-hour rate) Ah 48
Electrolytic fluid specific gravity [fully charged state at 20 C (68 F)] 1.220  1.290
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
FLUID LEVEL AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK

M1541000900502
CAUTION
 If the battery is used with the electrolyte level below the
LOWER LEVEL indicator, there is the danger that explo-
sions may occur, so add water to the battery until the
electrolyte level is between the LOWER LEVEL and
UPPER LEVEL indications.
 If too much water is added to make the level rise above
the UPPER LEVEL indication, the electrolyte may leak
out, so adjust so that the electrolyte level is between
the LOWER LEVEL and UPPER LEVEL indications.
1. Check that the battery electrolyte level is between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL indications.
2. Use a specific gravity meter and a thermometer to measure
OK the specific gravity.
Standard value: 1.220  1.290 <electrolyte temperature
20C (68F)>
The specific gravity of the battery electrolyte changes accord-
Thermometer
ing to the temperature, so the specific gravity when the electro-
lyte is at a temperature of 20C can be calculated using the
following formula. Use the converted value to judge whether
Specific the electrolyte is okay or not.
gravity meter
D20 = (t  20)  0.0007 + Dt
D20: Specific gravity converted to a value for electro-
lyte temperature of 20C
t: Electrolyte temperature at the time of measurement
Dt: Actual specific gravity
AC102027AB
TSB Revision
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL 54A-5
BATTERY
BATTERY CHARGING
M1541001102293
WARNING
When batteries are being charged, an explo-
sive gas forms beneath the cover of each
cell. Do not smoke near batteries on charge
or which have recently been charged. Do not
break live circuits at the terminals of the bat-
teries on charge. A spark will occur where
the live circuit is broken. Keep all open
flames away from the battery.
Battery electrolyte temperature may temporarily be
allowed to rise to 55 C (131 F). Increase of electro-
lyte temperature above 55 C (131 F) is harmful to
the battery, causing deformation of battery cell,
decrease in life of battery, etc.
CHARGE RATE
Recommended rate and time for charging completely
.
flat battery fully is shown in the charge rate chart.

When the specific gravity of electrolyte keeps 1.22 to
1.29 for more than one hour, charging should be
stopped.
Charge Rate Chart

Battery Charging time
55D23L
Slow charging 5 amps 10 hours
10 amps 5 hours
Fast charging 20 amps 3 hours
30 amps 2 hours
BATTERY TEST
M1541001202405
BATTERY TESTING PROCEDURE STEP 3. Check the battery case and cover.
(1) Remove the hold-downs and shields.
STEP 1. Check the battery cables. (2) Check for broken/cracked case or cover.
(1) Remove the negative cable, then the positive Q: Is the battery case or cover faulty?
cable. YES : Replace the battery.
(2) Check for dirty or corroded connections. NO : Go to Step 4.
Q: Are the battery cables dirty or have corroded
connections? STEP 4. Check the open circuit voltage.
YES : Clean the battery cables. Then go to Step 2.
(1) Turn headlights on for 15 seconds.
NO : Go to Step 2.
(2) Turn headlights off for two minutes to allow
battery positive voltage to stabilize.
STEP 2. Check the battery posts. (3) Disconnect the battery cables.
Check for loose battery post. (4) Read open circuit voltage.
Q: Are the battery posts loose? Q: Is open circuit voltage 12.4 volts or more?
Yes : Replace the battery. YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 3. NO : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
BATTERY
STEP 5. Battery charging STEP 6. Check the load test.

Charge the battery. (See CHARGE RATE CHART (1) Connect a load tester to the battery.
P.54A-5) (2) Load the battery at the recommended discharge
rate (See LOAD TEST RATE CHART) for 15
Q: Is open circuit voltage 12.4 volts or more?
seconds.
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Replace the battery.
(3) Read voltage after 15 seconds, then remove
load.
(4) Compare the measured value with the minimum
voltage. (See LOAD TEST CHART.)
Q: Is the voltage higher than minimum voltage?
YES : The battery is normal.
NO : Replace the battery.
LOAD TEST RATE CHART

Battery Load test Cranking ratio [-18C Reserve capacity
(0F)]
55D23L 170 amps 356 amps 99 minutes
LOAD TEST CHART

Temperature 21 (70) 16 (61) to 10 (50) to 4 (40) to 9 1 (31) to 7 (20) to 12 (11) 18 (0) to
C (F) AND 20 (68) 15 (59) (48) 3 (37) 2 (28) to 8 (17) 13 (8)
ABOVE
Minimum 9.6 9.5 9.4 9.3 9.1 8.9 8.7 8.5
voltage
TSB Revision
BATTERY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

M1541001301540
Post-installation Operation
 Learning Procedures Of Power Window Fully Closed
Position <Vehicles with safety system (driver’s side
door)> (Refer to GROUP 42A, Door P.42A-57).
7 4.0 ± 1.0 N·m

35 ± 8 in-lb
9.0 ± 2.0 N·m

80 ± 17 in-lb
3
14 ± 3 N·m
124 ± 26 in-lb
9
2
6.0 ± 2.0 N·m 1
53 ± 17 in-lb
9.0 ± 2.0 N·m 4

80 ± 17 in-lb
8
6.0 ± 2.0 N·m
53 ± 17 in-lb
10
11
5
ACB03311AB
Removal steps Removal steps (Continued)

1. Connection of the battery wiring harness 5. Battery
(negative battery terminal) 6. Battery seat
2. Fusible link box cover, connection of the 7. Fusible link box cover
control wiring harness (positive battery 8. Connection of the control wiring harness
terminal), connection of the front wiring (positive battery terminal)
harness (positive battery terminal), 9. Connection of the front wiring harness
fusible link box and battery terminal (positive battery terminal)
3. Battery holder 10. Fusible link box
4. Battery bolt 11. Battery terminal
TSB Revision
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION SWITCH
SPECIAL TOOL
M1541200600301
Tool Tool number and Supersession Application

name
MB991223 General service Continuity check and voltage
a
a. MB991219 tool (jumper) measurement at harness wire or
b. MB991220 connector
c. MB991221 a. For checking connector pin
d. MB991222 contact pressure
b b. For checking power supply
Harness set
a. Check harness circuit
b. LED harness c. For checking power supply
circuit
c. LED harness
c adapter d. For connecting a locally sourced
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA
MB992006  Continuity check and voltage

Extra fine probe measurement at harness wire or
connector
MB992006
MB990784 Ornament Lower panel and steering column

remover cover removal
MB990784
DIAGNOSIS
STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE

SHOOTING
M1541201400214
Refer to Group 00  Contents of troubleshooting P.00-6.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CHART
M1541201100514
CAUTION
During troubleshooting, a DTC associated with another system may be stored when the ignition
switch is turned on with connector(s) disconnected. On completion, confirm all systems for DTC(s). If
DTC(s) are stored, erase them all.
Trouble symptom Reference page
Malfunction of the ignition switch power supply system. P.54A-9
TSB Revision
IGNITION SWITCH
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Malfunction of the ignition switch power supply system
CAUTION STEP 2. Check the fuse.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the
Q: Is the check result normal?
input and output signal circuits are normal.
.
YES : Go to Step 3.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) NO : Replace the fuse. (Check that there is not a
When the power supply system of ignition switch has short to ground in the circuit of lower
a problem, none of the equipment and system con- reaches before replacing. If there are any
nected to the ignition switch works even if the ignition problems, replace the fuse after the circuit
switch is operated. of lower reaches is repaired.)
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS STEP 3. Check of open circuit in power supply

 The ignition switch may be defective line between ignition switch connector and
 The fuse may be defective junction block connector
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective Q: Is the check result normal?
 The wiring harness or connectors may have YES : Go to Step 5.
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
nals pushed back in the connector
STEP 4. Check the ignition switch.
DIAGNOSIS Refer to P.54A-12.
Required Special Tools: Q: Is the ignition switch in good condition?
 MB992006: Extra fine probe YES : Go to Step 5.
 MB991223: Harness set NO : Replace the ignition switch.
STEP 1. Check the battery power supply circuit STEP 5. Retest the system.
to the ignition switch. Measure the voltage at Q: When the ignition switch is operated, do the
ignition switch connector. equipment and system work normally?
(1) Disconnect the ignition switch connector and YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
measure the voltage at ignition switch connector malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00, How to
wiring harness side. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
(2) Check the voltage between the ignition switch Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
connector (power supply terminal) and ground. Malfunction P.00-13).
OK: The voltage should measure approxi- NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage).
Q: Is the measured voltage approximately 12 volts
(battery positive voltage)?
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 2.
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
IGNITION KEY REMINDER TONE ALARM

INSPECTION
M1541200900120
1. With the driver's door kept closed, release the steering lock,
and then turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" (OFF) position
(key inserted).
TSB Revision
IGNITION SWITCH
2. Open the driver's door.

3. Check that the tone alarm sounds normally.
4. If not, carry out the troubleshooting.(Refer to P.54A-35.)
M1541200300883
Pre-removal operation Post-installation operation

 Removal of Steering wheel assembly (Refer to GROUP  Installation of Instrument panel cover lower (Refer to
37  Steering wheel P.37-62.) GROUP 52A  Instrument Lower Panel P.52A-6.)
 Removal of Steering column lower cover and steering col-  Removal of Column switch body (Refer to GROUP 54A 
umn upper cover (Refer to GROUP 37  Steering Shaft Column Switch P.54A-152.)
P.37-64.)  Installation of Steering column lower cover and steering
 Removal of Column switch body (Refer to GROUP 54A  column upper cover (Refer to GROUP 37  Steering Shaft
Column Switch P.54A-152.) P.37-64.)
 Removal of Instrument panel cover lower (Refer to  Removal of Steering wheel assembly (Refer to GROUP
GROUP 52A  Instrument lower panel P.52A-6.) 37  Steering wheel P.37-62.)
3
2
ACC03245AB
Removal Steps Removal Steps (Continued)

<<A>> 1. Steering lock hole 2. Key reminder switch, key ring
2. Key reminder switch and key ring <Vehicles without immobilizer
antenna assembly <Vehicles with system>
immobilizer system> 3. Engine starting switch assembly
(Refer to GROUP 37  Steering
shaft disassembly and reassembly
P.37-64).
TSB Revision
IGNITION SWITCH
REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

.
<<A>> STEERING LOCK HOLE REMOVAL

1. Insert the key into the steering lock hole, and turn the
ignition key to the ACC position.
2. Using a flat-tipped precision screwdriver or similar tool,
press the lock button located at the part "A" shown in the
figure.
Part A
ACB03367AB
ACB03366AB
3. Subsequently, using a flat-tipped precision screwdriver or

similar tool, press the step generated at the part "B" toward
the direction of front passenger's seat. Then, pull out the
Part B
ignition key, and then remove the steering lock hole.
ACB03368AB
ACB03365AB
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
INSPECTION
IGNITION SWITCH CHECK

M1541200400299
With the key reminder switch mounted to the vehicle, discon-
nect the ignition switch connection connector, and then perform
the continuity check in each ignition key position.
Ignition key Terminal Normal
position number condition
LOCK 1  2, 1  4, 1  No continuity
5, 1  6
ACC 16 Continuity exists
ACB03615AB (2 ohms or less)
ON 1246 Continuity exists
(2 ohms or less)
START 125 Continuity exists
(2 ohms or less)
KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION

M1541200500304
With the key reminder switch mounted to the vehicle, discon-
nect the key reminder switch connection connector, and then
perform the continuity check.
Key status Terminal Normal
number condition
Key removed 46 Continuity
exists (2
ohms or less)
ACB03616 AB Key inserted 46 No continuity
COMBINATION METER
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
M1540200200827
Item Standard Value

Speedometer indication tolerance {mph (km/h)} 25 (40) 23.5  26.5 (40.5  44.5)
<Vehicles for USA> 50 (80) 48.5  51.5 (81.5  86.5)
75 (120) 73.5  76.5 (122.5  128.5)
100 (160) 98.5  102.5 (162.5  169.5)
Speedometer indication tolerance {km/h (mph)} 40 (25) 40.5  44.5 (25.5  28.5)
<Vehicles for CANADA> 80 (50) 81.5  86.5 (50.5  53.5)
120 (75) 122.5  128.5 (76.0  78.0)
160 (100) 162.5  169.5 (101.5  106.5)
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
Item Standard Value

Tachometer indication tolerance (r/min) 700 600  800
3,000 2,850  3,150
5,000 4,750  5,250
6,000 5,700  6,300
Fuel level sensor resistance (ohms) Stopper position "F" 13.0  1.0
Stopper position "E" 120.0  1.0
Fuel level sensor float height {mm (in)} Stopper position "F" 135.4  5.0 (5.3  0.2)
Stopper position "E" 14.9  5.0 (0.6  0.2)
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1540200300426

name
a a. MB992744  DTC, data list and actuator test
b. MB992745 check.
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
MB992745 vehicles with
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
DO NOT USE vehicles without
CAN
MB992746 communication)
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

name
MB991958 MB991824-KIT CAUTION
a
a. MB991824 NOTE: G: M.U.T.-III main harness A
b. MB991827 MB991826 (MB991910) should be used.
c. MB991910 M.U.T.-III Trigger M.U.T.-III main harness B and C
d. MB991911 Harness is not should not be used for this
MB991824 e. MB991914 necessary when vehicle.
b pushing V.C.I. DTC, data list and actuator test
f. MB991825
ENTER key. check.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
MB991910 c. M.U.T.-III main
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
DO NOT USE without CAN
communication
MB991914 system)
f e. M.U.T.-III main
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
MB991825 f. M.U.T.-III
g
measurement
adapter
g. M.U.T.-III trigger
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC

TROUBLESHOOTING
M1540203800118
Refer to GROUP 00, Contents of troubleshooting P.00-6.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
M1540200500271
HOW TO CONNECT THE SCAN TOOL (M.U.T.-III)

Required Special Tools:
 MB992744: Vehicle communication interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
 MB992745: V.C.I.-Lite main harness A
 MB992747: V.C.I.-Lite USB cable short
 MB992748: V.C.I.-Lite USB cable long
 MB991958: Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III Sub Assembly)
 MB991824: Vehicles Communication Interface (V.C.I.)
 MB991827: M.U.T.-III USB Cable
 MB991910: M.U.T.-III Main Harness A (Vehicles with
CAN communication system)
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), always turn the
ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) position before con-
necting or disconnecting scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
Data link connector
1. Ensure that the ignition switch is at the "LOCK" (OFF)
position.
2. Start up the personal computer.
MB992745, MB991910
3. Connect special tool MB992747/M992748 or special tool
MB991827 to special tool MB992744 or special tool
MB991824 and the personal computer.
4. Connect special tool MB992745 or special tool MB991910 to
MB992744, MB991824
special tool MB992744 or special tool MB991824.
the data link connector.
NOTE: When the special tool MB992745 is connected to the
data link connector, the special tool MB992744 indicator
light will be illuminated in a green color.
6. Turn the power switch of special tool MB991824 to the "ON"
position. <When using the special tool MB991824>
MB992747, MB992748, MB991827 ACC02853 AB
NOTE: When special tool MB991824 is energized, special
tool MB991824 indicator light will be illuminated in a green
color.
7. Start the M.U.T.-III system on the personal computer.
NOTE: Disconnecting scan tool (M.U.T.-III) is the reverse of the
connecting sequence, making sure that the ignition switch is at
the "LOCK" (OFF) position.
HOW TO READ AND ERASE DIAGNOSTIC

TROUBLE CODES
(V.C.I.-Lite)
NOTE: If the battery voltage is low, diagnostic trouble codes will
not be set. Check the battery if scan tool (M.U.T.-III) does not
display.
1. Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III) to the data link connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
3. Select "System select" from the start-up screen.
4. Select "From 2006 MY" of "Model Year." When the "Vehicle
Information" is displayed, check the contents.
5. Select "Meter" from "System List," and press the "OK"
button.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
NOTE: When the "Loading Option Setup" list is displayed,

check the applicable item.
6. Select "Diagnostic Trouble Code" to read the DTC.
7. If a DTC is stored, it is shown.
8. Choose "Erase DTCs" to erase the DTC.
HOW TO DIAGNOSE THE CAN BUS LINES

(V.C.I.-Lite)
3. Select "CAN bus diagnosis" from the start-up screen.
4. When the vehicle information is displayed, confirm that it
matches the vehicle being diagnosed.
 If they match, go to Step 8.
 If not, go to Step 5.
5. Select the "view vehicle information" button.
6. Enter the vehicle information and select the "OK" button.
7. When the vehicle information is displayed, confirm again
that it matches the vehicle being diagnosed.
8. Select the "OK" button.
9. When the optional equipment screen is displayed, choose
the one which the vehicle is fitted with, and then select the
"OK" button.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
CHECK OF FREEZE FRAME DATA

.
When detecting fault and storing the DTC, the ECU connected to CAN bus line obtains the data before the
determination of the DTC and the data when the DTC is determined, and then stores the ECU status of that
time. By analyzing each data from scan tool, the troubleshooting can be performed more efficiently. The dis-
played items are as the table below.
DISPLAY ITEM LIST
Item No. Item name Data item Unit
01 Odometer Total driving distance after the diagnostic trouble mile*
code is generated
02 Ignition cycle Number of times the ignition switch is turned "ON" or Number of
"LOCK (OFF)" after the past failure transition counts is
displayed.
04 Accumulated minute Cumulative time for current malfunction of min
diagnostic trouble code
NOTE: *: If a failure occurs to both the ASC-ECU and
ETACS-ECU, 0000 mile or FFFF mile is displayed on
the scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
M1540200600728
CAUTION
 During troubleshooting, a DTC associated with other system may be stored when the ignition
switch is turned on with connector(s) disconnected. On completion, check all systems for DTCs. If
DTCs are stored, erase them all.
 When the combination meter is required to be replaced as a result of the troubleshooting, the cur-
rent driving distance and number of elapsed days to be used for service reminder function must
be entered into the meter after the replacement. Therefore, read "Integrated mileage for reminder,"
"Integrated days for reminder," "Mileage until Extra reminder," "Months until Extra reminder," and
"Current Schedule" from the meter before the replacement using the special function of scan tool
(M.U.T.-III), and note them. For the operation method of scan tool (M.U.T.-III), refer to P.54A-55. If
"Integrated mileage for reminder" or "Integrated days for reminder" cannot be read by the scan
tool (M.U.T.-III), follow the method described below.
a. For the driving distance for check warning, use the driving distance displayed on the multi
information display.
b. For the elapsed days for check warning, calculate the number of elapsed days from the deliv-
ery date to the customer (service remainder function start date) and current date.
DTC No. Diagnostic item Reference page

B1200 Odometer failure P.54A-19
B1201 Fuel information problem P.54A-19
B1209 Test mode P.54A-21
B2463 Rheostat switch sticking P.54A-21
U0100 Engine CAN timeout P.54A-21
U0101 T/M CAN timeout P.54A-22
U0121 ABS/ASC CAN timeout P.54A-24
U0131 EPS CAN timeout P.54A-25
U0141 ETACS CAN timeout P.54A-26
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

U0151 SRS-ABG CAN timeout P.54A-27
U0154 OCM CAN timeout P.54A-28
U0168 WCM/F.A.S.T. CAN timeout P.54A-30
U1000 OSS CAN timeout P.54A-31
U1110 A/C CAN timeout/Not equipped P.54A-32
U1190 No receive fault detect signal P.54A-33
U1195 Coding not completed P.54A-34
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE PROCEDURES
DTC B1200: Odometer failure

. .
TROUBLE JUDGMENT TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

If the odometer information, which is stored in the The combination meter may be defective.
combination meter, is abnormal with the ignition
switch at the ON position and DTC No. U1190 is not
stored, DTC No. B1200 is stored.
DTC B1201: Fuel information problem
CAUTION
Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the communication circuit is normal.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
With the ignition switch at the ON position and DTC  The fuel pump module [fuel level sensor] may be
No. U1190 is not stored, if the combination meter defective.
detects the abnormal resistance of fuel level sensor  The combination meter may be defective.
circuit for 64 seconds continuously, DTC No. B1201  The wiring harness or connectors may have
is stored. loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
.
DIAGNOSIS
 MB991223: Harness Set
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 1. Check of fuel pump and gauge assembly circuit

(1) Disconnect the fuel pump and gauge assembly connector.
(2) Use the special tool Check harness (MB991219) to connect
a test light (12 V - 3.4 W) between the wiring harness
connector terminals.
(3) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(4) Check if the test light illuminates.
OK: Illuminates
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 2.
STEP 2. Check the fuel level sensor.

Check to see if the fuel level sensor is normal (Refer to
P.54A-54).
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Replace the fuel level sensor.
STEP 3. Resistance measurement at the fuel pump and

gauge assembly connector
(1) Disconnect the fuel pump and gauge assembly connector,
the measure at the harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the fuel pump and gauge
assembly connector (ground terminal) and ground.
OK: The measured value should be 2 ohm or less.
Q: Does the measured resistance value correspond with
this range?
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in ground line between fuel

pump and gauge assembly connector and ground.
YES : Go to Step 7.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness, and then
go to Step 7.
STEP 5. Check of open circuit in F/G line between

combination meter connector and fuel pump and gauge
assembly connector.
YES : Go to Step 6.
go to Step 7.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 6. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), perform actuator test.

 Item 03: Fuel gauge (target value): 0 100%
OK: The fuel gauge operates.
YES : Go to Step 7.
NO : Replace the combination meter.
STEP 7. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.

Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination meter.
(1) Erase the DTC.
(2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF) position to "ON"
position.
(3) Check if DTC is stored.
Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Replace the combination meter.
NO : The diagnosis is complete.
DTC B1209: B1209 Test mode

. .

When the mode is changed to the meter test mode The combination meter may be defective
(supplier mode) with the ignition switch at the ON
position and DTC No. U1190 is not stored, the com-
bination meter stores DTC No. B1209.
DTC B2463: Rheostat switch sticking

. .

If the combination meter detects the multi-informa-  The combination meter may be defective.
tion display switch pressed state for 60 seconds or
more continuously with the ignition switch at the ON
position and DTC No. U1190 is not stored, DTC No.
B2463 is stored.
DTC U0100: Engine CAN timeout

.
CAUTION JUDGMENT CRITERIA

 If DTC No. U0100 is stored, be sure to diag- With the ignition switch is at ON position, DTC No.
nose the CAN bus line. U1190 is not stored and DTC No. U1195 is not
 When replacing the ECU, always check that stored, if the communication with engine control
the communication circuit is normal. module cannot be established for 2500 ms or more,
.
the combination meter determines that a problem

DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
has occurred.
The combination meter stores DTC No.U0100 when
it cannot receive signals from the engine control .
module.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.

 The CAN bus line may be defective. Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination
 The combination meter may be defective. meter.
 The engine control module may be defective. (1) Erase the DTC.
(2) Turn the ignition switch from the LOCK (OFF)
DIAGNOSIS position to the ON position.
(3) Check if the DTC is stored.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the Q: Is the DTC stored?
CAN bus line YES : Replace the engine control module and
CAUTION then go to Step 6.
NO : A poor connection, open circuit, or other
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" intermittent malfunction in the CAN bus line
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- between the combination meter and the
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). engine control module. (Refer to GROUP 00
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to  How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." Service Points - How to Cope with
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13.)
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
position. Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? meter.
YES : Go to Step 2. (1) Erase the DTC.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP (2) Turn the ignition switch from the LOCK (OFF)
54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12). position to the ON position.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the Q: Is the DTC stored?
engine control module diagnostic trouble code YES : Replace the combination meter and then go
Check if DTC is stored in the engine control module. to Step 6.
NO : A poor connection, open circuit, or other
Q: Is the DTC stored? intermittent malfunction in the CAN bus line
YES : Troubleshoot the MFI (Refer to GROUP between the combination meter and the
13A  DTC Chart P.13A-47.) engine control module. (Refer to GROUP 00
NO : Go to Step 3.
 How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection
Service Points - How to Cope with
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13.)
ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
Check if DTC No. U0100 is stored in the
ETACS-ECU.
Recheck if the DTC is stored.
Q: Is the DTC stored? (1) Erase the DTC.
YES : Go to Step 4. (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
NO : Go to Step 5. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
YES : Go to Step 1.
NO : The procedure is complete.
DTC U0101: T/M CAN timeout
CAUTION  Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that

 If DTC U0101 is stored in the combination the communication circuit is normal.
meter, always diagnose the CAN bus lines.
.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the

The combination meter stores DTC No.U0101 when ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
it cannot receive signals from the TCM. Check if DTC No. U0101 is stored in the
.
ETACS-ECU.
JUDGMENT CRITERIA Q: Is the DTC stored?
With the ignition switch is at ON position, DTC No. YES : Go to Step 4.
U1190 is not stored and DTC No. U1195 is not NO : Go to Step 5.
stored, if the communication with TCM cannot be
established for 2500 ms or more, the combination
meter determines that a problem has occurred.
.
(1) Erase the DTC.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
 The CAN bus line may be defective. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
 The combination meter may be defective.
 The TCM may be defective. YES : Replace TCM and then go to Step 6.
NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
DIAGNOSIS intermittent malfunction is present in the
CAN bus lines between the TCM and the
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00 
CAN bus line How to use troubleshooting/Inspection
Service Points P.00-13).
CAUTION
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Recheck if the DTC is stored.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). (1) Erase the DTC.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Q: Is the DTC stored?
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. YES : Replace combination meter and then go to
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) Step 6.
position. NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? intermittent malfunction is present in the
YES : Go to Step 2. CAN bus lines between the TCM and the
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00 
54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12). How to use troubleshooting/Inspection
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the CVT
diagnostic trouble code STEP 6. Check whether the DTC is reset.
Check if DTC is stored in the TCM. Recheck if the DTC is stored.
(1) Erase the DTC.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
YES : Diagnose the CVT system (GROUP 23A 
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
Troubleshooting P.23A-16).
NO : Go to Step 3. Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Go to Step 1.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
DTC U0121: ABS/ASC CAN timeout
CAUTION STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the

 If DTC No. U0121 is stored, be sure to diag- ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
nose the CAN bus line. Check if DTC No. U0121 is stored in the
 When replacing the ECU, always check that ETACS-ECU.
the communication circuit is normal. Q: Is the DTC stored?
.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION YES : Go to Step 4.

NO : Go to Step 5.
The combination meter stores DTC No.U0121 when
it cannot receive signals from the ASC-ECU.
.
JUDGMENT CRITERIA Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination

meter.
With the ignition switch is at ON position, DTC No.
(1) Erase the DTC.
U1190 is not stored and DTC No. U1195 is not
(2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
stored, if the communication with ASC-ECU cannot
position to "ON" position.
be established for 2500 ms or more, the combination
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
YES : Replace the ASC-ECU and then go to Step
.
6.
 The CAN bus line may be defective. NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
 The combination meter may be defective. intermittent malfunction is present in the
 The ASC-ECU may be defective. CAN bus lines between the ASC-ECU and
the combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00
DIAGNOSIS  How to use troubleshooting/Inspection
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
CAN bus line STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
CAUTION Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), meter.
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (1) Erase the DTC.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). position to "ON" position.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to (3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." Q: Is the DTC stored?
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. YES : Replace the combination meter. and then
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. go to Step 6.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
position. intermittent malfunction is present in the
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? CAN bus lines between the ASC-ECU and
YES : Go to Step 2. the combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP  How to use troubleshooting/Inspection
54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12). Service Points P.00-13).
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the ASC

Check if DTC is stored in the ASC-ECU.
YES : Diagnose the ASC-ECU (Refer to GROUP
35C  Troubleshooting P.35C-16).
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

Recheck if the DTC is stored in the combination
meter.
(1) Erase the DTC.
YES : Return to Step 1.
DTC U0131: EPS CAN timeout
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
 If DTC No. U0131 is stored, be sure to diag-
nose the CAN bus line. STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
 When replacing the ECU, always check that CAN bus line
the communication circuit is normal.
.
CAUTION
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
The combination meter stores DTC No.U0131 when always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
it cannot receive signals from the EPS-ECU. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to

JUDGMENT CRITERIA connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15."
With the ignition switch is at ON position, DTC No. (2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
U1190 is not stored and DTC No. U1195 is not (3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
stored, if the communication with EPS-ECU cannot (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
be established for 2500 ms or more, the combination position.
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal?
.
YES : Go to Step 2.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP
 The CAN bus line may be defective. 54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12).
 The EPS-ECU may be defective.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the EPS
diagnostic trouble code.
Check if DTC is stored in the EPS-ECU.
YES : Diagnose the EPS-ECU (Refer to GROUP
37  Troubleshooting P.37-8).
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the

ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
Check if DTC No. U0131 is stored in the
ETACS-ECU.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code. STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
Recheck if the DTC is stored. Recheck if the DTC is stored.
(1) Erase the DTC. (1) Erase the DTC.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position. (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
Q: Is the DTC stored? Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Replace the EPS-ECU and then go to Step YES : Replace the combination meter and then go
6. to Step 6.
NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
intermittent malfunction is present in the intermittent malfunction is present in the
CAN bus lines between the EPS-ECU and CAN bus lines between the EPS-ECU and
the combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00 the combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00
 How to use troubleshooting/Inspection  How to use troubleshooting/Inspection
Service Points P.00-13). Service Points P.00-13).

meter.
(1) Erase the DTC.
DTC U0141: ETACS CAN timeout
CAUTION  The ETACS-ECU may be defective.

 If DTC No. U0141 is stored, be sure to diag-
nose the CAN bus line. DIAGNOSIS
 When replacing the ECU, always check that
the communication circuit is normal. STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
CAN bus line
.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
The combination meter stores DTC No.U0141 when CAUTION
it cannot receive signals from the ETACS-ECU. To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-

JUDGMENT CRITERIA ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
With the ignition switch is at ON position, DTC No. (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
U1190 is not stored and DTC No. U1195 is not connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15."
stored, if the communication with ETACS-ECU can- (2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
not be established for 2500 ms or more, the combi- (3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
nation meter determines that a problem has (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
occurred. position.
.

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS YES : Go to Step 2.
 The CAN bus line may be defective. NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP
 The combination meter may be defective. 54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12).
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
ETACS diagnostic trouble code Recheck if the DTC is stored.
Check if DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU. (1) Erase the DTC.
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU (Refer to (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
P.54A-218). Q: Is the DTC stored?
NO : Go to Step 3. YES : Replace combination meter and then go to
Step 6.
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the MFI
intermittent malfunction is present in the
CAN bus lines between the ETACS-ECU
Check if DTC No. U0141 is stored in engine control
and the combination meter (Refer to
module.
GROUP 00  How to use
Q: Is the DTC stored? troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points
YES : Go to Step 4. P.00-13).
NO : Go to Step 5.

STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code. Recheck if the DTC is stored.
Recheck if the DTC is stored. (1) Erase the DTC.
(1) Erase the DTC. (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
Q: Is the DTC stored? YES : Go to Step 1.
YES : Replace ETACS-ECU and then go to Step NO : The procedure is complete.
6.
CAN bus lines between the ETACS-ECU
and the combination meter (Refer to
GROUP 00  How to use
troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points
P.00-13).
DTC U0151: SRS-ABG CAN timeout

 When replacing the ECU, always check that stored, if the communication with SRS-ECU cannot
the communication circuit is normal. be established for 2500 ms or more, the combination
.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION .
The combination meter stores DTC No.U0151 when TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

it cannot receive signals from the SRS-ECU.  The CAN bus line may be defective.
.
 The SRS-ECU may be defective.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
DIAGNOSIS STEP 3. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.

Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the meter.
CAN bus line (1) Erase the DTC.
CAUTION
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Q: Is the DTC stored?
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). YES : Replace the SRS-ECU and then go to Step
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to 4.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. intermittent malfunction is present in the
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. CAN bus lines between the SRS-ECU and
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) the combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00
position.  How to use troubleshooting/Inspection
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12). Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination
meter.
(1) Erase the DTC.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the SRS
Check if DTC is stored in the SRS-ECU.
YES : Diagnose the SRS-ECU (Refer to GROUP Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Replace the combination meter. and then
52B  Troubleshooting P.52B-14).
NO : Go to Step 3. go to Step 5.
CAN bus lines between the SRS-ECU and
 How to use troubleshooting/Inspection

meter.
(1) Erase the DTC.
DTC U0154: OCM CAN timeout
CAUTION  When replacing the ECU, always check that

 If DTC No. U0154 is set, be sure to diagnose the communication circuit is normal.
the CAN bus line.
.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the SRS
The combination meter sets DTC No.U0154 when it diagnostic trouble code.
cannot receive signals from the occupant classifica- Check if DTC No. U0154 is set in the SRS-ECU.
tion-ECU.
Q: Is the DTC set?
.
YES : Go to Step 4.
JUDGMENT CRITERIA NO : Go to Step 5.
With the ignition switch is at "ON" position, DTC No.
U1190 is not set and DTC No. U1195 is not set, if the
communication with occupant classification-ECU
Check again if the DTC is set in the combination
cannot be established for 2500 ms or more, the com-
meter.
bination meter determines that a problem has
(1) Erase the DTC.
occurred.
(2) Turn the ignition switch from the LOCK (OFF)
.
position to the "ON" position.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (3) Check if the DTC is set.
 The CAN bus line may be defective.
Q: Is the DTC set?
 The combination meter may be defective. YES : Replace the occupant classification-ECU
 The occupant classification-ECU may be defec- and then go to Step 6.
tive. NO : A poor connection, open circuit, or other
intermittent malfunction in the CAN bus line
DIAGNOSIS between the combination meter and the
occupant classification-ECU. (Refer to
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the GROUP 00  How to Use
CAN bus line Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points -
How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
CAUTION
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), P.00-13.)
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Check again if the DTC is set in the combination
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to meter.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." (1) Erase the DTC.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. (2) Turn the ignition switch from the LOCK (OFF)
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. position to the "ON" position.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) (3) Check if the DTC is set.
position. Q: Is the DTC set?
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? YES : Replace the combination meter and then go
YES : Go to Step 2. to Step 6.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP NO : A poor connection, open circuit, or other
54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12). intermittent malfunction in the CAN bus line
between the combination meter and the
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the OCM occupant classification-ECU. (Refer to
diagnostic trouble code GROUP 00  How to Use
Check if DTC is set in the occupant classifica- Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points -
tion-ECU. How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
P.00-13.)
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Troubleshoot the occupant
classification-ECU (Refer to GROUP 52B 
DTC Chart P.52B-197.)
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

Recheck if the DTC is set.
(1) Erase the DTC.
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set
again.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Go to Step 1.
DTC U0168: WCM/F.A.S.T. CAN timeout
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
 If DTC No. U0168 is set, be sure to diagnose
the CAN bus line. STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
.
CAUTION
The combination meter sets DTC No.U0100 when it always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
cannot receive signals from the KOS&OSS-ECU. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
.

With the ignition switch is at "ON" position, DTC No. (2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
U1190 is not set and DTC No. U1195 is not set, if the (3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
communication with KOS&OSS-ECU cannot be (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
established for 2500 ms or more, the combination position.
.
YES : Go to Step 2.
 The KOS&OSS-ECU may be defective.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the KOS
Check if DTC is set in the KOS&OSS-ECU.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Troubleshoot the KOS. Refer to GROUP
42B  DTC Chart P.42B-13.
NO : Go to Step 3.

ETACS diagnostic trouble code
Check if DTC No. U0168 is set in the ETACS-ECU.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
Recheck if the DTC is set. Recheck if the DTC is set.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position. (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set
again. again.
Q: Is the DTC set? Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Replace KOS&OSS-ECU and then go to YES : Replace combination meter and then go to
Step 6. Step 6.
NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
intermittent malfunction is present in the intermittent malfunction is present in the
CAN bus lines between the CAN bus lines between the
KOS&OSS-ECU and the combination meter KOS&OSS-ECU and the combination meter
(Refer to GROUP 00  How to use (Refer to GROUP 00  How to use
troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points
P.00-13). P.00-13).

Recheck if the DTC is set.
(1) Erase the DTC.
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set
again.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Go to Step 1.
DTC U1000: OSS CAN timeout
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
 If DTC No. U1000 is set, be sure to diagnose
the CAN bus line. STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
.
CAUTION
The combination meter sets DTC No.U1000 when it always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
cannot receive signals from the KOS&OSS-ECU. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
.

With the ignition switch is at "ON" position, DTC No. (2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
U1190 is not set and DTC No. U1195 is not set, if the (3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
communication with KOS&OSS-ECU cannot be (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
established for 2500 ms or more, the combination position.
.
YES : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the KOS STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
diagnostic trouble code Recheck if the DTC is set.
Check if DTC is set in the KOS&OSS-ECU. (1) Erase the DTC.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Troubleshoot the KOS&OSS-ECU (Refer to (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set
GROUP 42B  Troubleshooting P.42B-13). again.
NO : Go to Step 3. Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Replace combination meter and then go to
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the Step 6.
ETACS diagnostic trouble code
Check if DTC No. U1000 is set in the ETACS-ECU. intermittent malfunction is present in the
CAN bus lines between the
Q: Is the DTC set? KOS&OSS-ECU and the combination meter
YES : Go to Step 4. (Refer to GROUP 00  How to use
NO : Go to Step 5. troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points
P.00-13).
Recheck if the DTC is set. STEP 6. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
(1) Erase the DTC. Recheck if the DTC is set.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position. (1) Erase the DTC.
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
again. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set
Q: Is the DTC set? again.
YES : Replace KOS&OSS-ECU and then go to
Q: Is the DTC set?
Step 6. YES : Go to Step 1.
KOS&OSS-ECU and the combination meter
(Refer to GROUP 00  How to use
troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points
P.00-13).
DTC U1110: A/C CAN timeout/Not equipped

 When replacing the ECU, always check that stored, if the communication with engine control
the communication circuit is normal. module cannot be established for 2500 ms or more,
.
the combination meter determines that a problem
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION has occurred.
The combination meter stores DTC No.U0100 when .
it cannot receive signals from the A/C-ECU. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

.
 The A/C-ECU may be defective.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the (1) Erase the DTC.
CAN bus line (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Q: Is the DTC stored?
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" YES : Replace A/C-ECU and then go to Step 6.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). intermittent malfunction is present in the
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to CAN bus lines between the A/C-ECU and
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." the combination meter (Refer to GROUP 00
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.  How to use troubleshooting/Inspection
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. Service Points P.00-13).
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
position. STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? Recheck if the DTC is stored.
YES : Go to Step 2. (1) Erase the DTC.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP (2) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" position.
54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12). (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the A/C YES : Replace combination meter and then go to
diagnostic trouble code Step 6.
Check if DTC is stored in the A/C-ECU. NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
CAN bus lines between the A/C-ECU and
YES : Troubleshoot the A/C-ECU (Refer to
GROUP 55B  Troubleshooting P.55B-8).
NO : Go to Step 3.  How to use troubleshooting/Inspection

ETACS diagnostic trouble code STEP 6. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
Check if DTC No. U1110 is stored in the Recheck if the DTC is stored.
ETACS-ECU. (1) Erase the DTC.
Q: Is the DTC stored? (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
YES : Go to Step 4.
YES : Go to Step 1.
DTC U1190: No receive fault detect signal

 If DTC No. U1190 is stored, be sure to diag- ETACS-ECU sends the DTC (U code) detection per-
nose the CAN bus line. mission or prohibition signal to each ECU connected
 When replacing the ECU, always check that to the CAN bus line. If the combination meter cannot
the communication circuit is normal. receive the DTC (U code) detection permission or
.
prohibition signal for 5 seconds after turning the elec-
tric motor switch to ON position, DTC U1190 will be
set.
.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS STEP 2. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.

 The CAN bus line may be defective. Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective. meter.
(1) Erase the DTC.
DIAGNOSIS (2) Turn the ignition motor switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the (3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
CAN bus line Q: Is the DTC stored?
CAUTION YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. Then go to Step
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), 3.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). STEP 3. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to Recheck if the DTC is stored in the combination
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." meter.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. (1) Erase the DTC.
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. (2) Turn the ignition motor switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) position to "ON" position.
position. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Go to Step 2. YES : Return to Step 1.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP NO : The procedure is complete.
54C, Diagnosis P.54C-12).
DTC U1195: Coding not completed
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
 If DTC No. U1195 is stored, diagnose the CAN
bus lines. STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
.
CAUTION
If the vehicle information data is not registered to the always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
combination meter, the combination meter stores (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
DTC No. U1195. ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15."

JUDGMENT CRITERIA (2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
With the global coding counter value "0," if all the glo- (3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
bal coding data (vehicle information) are not stored, (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
the combination meter determines that a problem position.
has occurred.
.
YES : Go to Step 2.
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the STEP 3. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
ETACS diagnostic trouble code Check again if the DTC is stored in the combination
Check if DTC No. U1000 is stored in the meter.
ETACS-ECU. (1) Erase the DTC.
YES : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to position to "ON" position.
P.54A-218.
YES : Replace the combination meter.
NO : The trouble can be an intermittent
malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
Malfunction P.00-13).
M1540200800863
CAUTION
 During troubleshooting, a DTC associated with another system may be stored when the ignition
switch is turned on with connector(s) disconnected. On completion, confirm all systems for DTCs.
If DTCs are stored, erase them all.
 When the combination meter is required to be replaced as a result of the troubleshooting, the cur-
rent driving distance and number of elapsed days to be used for service reminder function must
be entered into the meter after the replacement. Therefore, read "Integrated mileage for reminder,"
"Integrated days for reminder," "Mileage until Extra reminder," "Months until Extra reminder," and
"Current Schedule" from the meter before the replacement using the special function of scan tool
(M.U.T.-III), and note them. For the operation method of scan tool (M.U.T.-III), refer to P.54A-55. If
"Integrated mileage for reminder" or "Integrated days for reminder" cannot be read by the scan
tool (M.U.T.-III), follow the method described below.
a. For the driving distance for check warning, use the driving distance displayed on the multi
information display.
b. For the elapsed days for check warning, calculate the number of elapsed days from the deliv-
ery date to the customer (service remainder function start date) and current date.
Trouble symptom Inspection Reference

Procedure page
No.
Power supply circuit check 1 P.54A-36
The odometer and the trip meter are not displayed. 2
No needle meters work. 3
If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indicator and warning lights 4
do not illuminate normally.
The speedometer does not work (the other meters work). 5 P.54A-38
The tachometer does not work (the other meters work). 6 P.54A-40
Tone alarm does not sound normally. 7 P.54A-41
Fuel gauge does not work (the other meters work) 8 P.54A-42
The combination meter light does not illuminate normally or the 9 P.54A-44
multi-information display is not displayed normally.
The multi-information display screen cannot be changed with the operation of 10 P.54A-45
the multi-information display switch.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

Procedure page
No.
Parking brake reminder tone alarm does not sound. 11 P.54A-46
Brake warning light does not illuminate. 12
Ambient temperature sensor does not work. 13 P.54A-47
Seat belt reminder function does not work normally. 14 P.54A-48
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: Power supply circuit check

Inspection Procedure 2: The odometer and the trip meter are not displayed.
Inspection Procedure 3: No needle meters work.
Inspection Procedure 4: If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indicator and warning
lights do not illuminate normally.
. .
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

If the odometer and trip meter is not displayed or no  The wiring harness or connectors may have
needle meters work, power supply to the combina- loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
tion meter, or the combination meter itself may have nals pushed back in the connector
a problem.  The combination meter may be defective
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the combination

meter diagnostic trouble code
Check if DTC is stored in the combination meter.
CAUTION
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to connect the
Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15."
position.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) position.
YES : Troubleshoot the combination meter (Refer to
P.54A-18).
NO : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 2. Voltage measurement at the combination meter

connector
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the wiring
harness side.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (OFF) position.
(3) Measure the voltage between the combination meter
connector (B+B terminal) and ground.
OK: The voltage should measure approximately 12
volts (battery positive voltage).
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in B+B line between the

fusible link and combination meter connector.
YES : The trouble can be an intermittent malfunction (Refer
to GROUP 00  How to Cope with Intermittent
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
STEP 4. Voltage measurement at the combination meter

connector
harness side.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(3) Measure the voltage between the combination meter
connector (IG1 terminal) and ground.
YES : Go to Step 7.
NO : Go to Step 5.
STEP 5. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data list

Check the input signal from the ignition switch (IG1) in the
ETACS-ECU.
 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Item No. Item name Normal
condition
30 IG SW (IG1) ON
OK: Normal condition is displayed.

YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to Inspection
Procedure 2 "The ignition switch (IG1) signal is not
received." P.37-62.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 6. Check of open circuit in IG1 line between the

ignition switch (IG1) and combination meter connector.
to GROUP 00  How to use
Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points  How to
Cope with Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13).
STEP 7. Resistance measurement at the combination

meter connector
harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the combination meter
connector (GND terminal) and ground.
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or less
YES : Go to Step 9.
NO : Go to Step 8.
STEP 8. Check of open circuit in GND line between

combination meter connector and ground.
STEP 9. Retest the system

Inspection Procedure 5: The speedometer does not work (The other meters work).
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT)

If only the speedometer does not operate, the combination
meter, the wiring harness or its connector may be defective.
.
 The wiring harness or connectors may have loose, cor-
roded, or damaged terminals, or terminals pushed back in
the connector
 The combination meter may be defective
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the CAN bus

line.
CAUTION
electric motor switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) position before
connecting or disconnecting scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
(2) Turn the electric motor switch to the "ON" position.
(4) Turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) position.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP 54C,
Diagnosis P.54C-12). On completion, go to Step 6.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the MFI

Check whether the MFI system-related DTC is stored.
YES : Diagnose MFI system. (Refer to GROUP 13A,
Troubleshooting P.13A-47.) After diagnosing the MFI
system, go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 3.

Check the vehicle speed signal data list of MFI system.
Item No.4: Vehicle speed signal (Refer to GROUP 13A, Data
list reference table P.13A-599.)
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Diagnose MFI system. (Refer to GROUP 13A,
Troubleshooting P.13A-599.) After diagnosing the
MFI system.
STEP 4. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check actuator test.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
(2) Conduct the actuator test of the combination meter.
 Item 1: Speedometer
 The speedometer operates up to the set position.
Q: Is the check result normally?
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Replace combination meter, then go to Step 6.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 5. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special Function"

 Item 4: Pointer (Refer to P.54A-51).
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Replace the combination meter, and then go to Step
6.
STEP 6. Retest the system.

Check that the speedometer works normally.
YES : The procedure is complete. (If no malfunctions are
found in all steps, an intermittent malfunction is
suspected. Refer to GROUP 00 / How to Cope with
Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13).
NO : Go to Step 1.
Inspection Procedure 6: The tachometer does not work (the other meters work).
DIAGNOSIS
.

If only the tachometer does not operate, the ignition
signal from the engine control module may not be STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
received or the combination meter may have a prob- CAN bus line
lem. CAUTION
. To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
DIAGNOSIS always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
 The combination meter may be defective (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
 The engine control module may be defective ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
position.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP
Complete the CAN troubleshooting, and
then go to Step 6.

combination meter diagnostic trouble code
YES : Troubleshoot the combination meter. Refer
to P.54A-18. Complete the combination
meter troubleshooting, then go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the MFI STEP 5. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special
diagnostic trouble code. Function"
Check if DTC is stored in the engine control module.  Item 4: Pointer (Refer to P.54A-51).
Q: Is the DTC stored? Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Troubleshoot the MFI (Refer to GROUP YES : Go to Step 6.
13A  Troubleshooting P.13A-47). NO : Replace the combination meter, and then go
Complete the engine troubleshooting, and to Step 6.
then go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 4.
Check that the tachometer works normally.
STEP 4. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check Q: Is the check result normal?
actuator test YES : The procedure is complete. (If no
 Item 2: Tachometer (Refer to P.54A-51). malfunctions are found in all steps, an
Q: Is the check result normal? intermittent malfunction is suspected. Refer
YES : Go to Step 5. to GROUP 00 / How to Cope with
NO : Replace the combination meter, and then go Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13).
to Step 6. NO : Go to Step 1.
Inspection Procedure 7: Tone alarm does not sound normally.
CAUTION  Driver's door switch ON signal

Before replacing the combination meter, be sure Light reminder tone alarm
to check that the power supply circuit, ground  Ignition switch OFF signal
circuit, and communication circuit are normal.  Lighting switch ON signal
 Driver's door switch ON signal
.

When the following signals are received via the CAN Door-ajar warning tone alarm
communication or signal line, the combination meter  Ignition switch ON signal
sounds the incorporated tone alarm according to the  Any door switch or liftgate switch ON signal
each pattern.  Vehicles speed signal
OSS-related malfunction warning tone alarm Freeze warning tone alarm
(vehicles with KOS)  Ignition switch ON signal
 Engine switch signal  Ambient temperature signal
 When the following conditions are met, and 1 Parking brake reminder tone alarm
second or more has elapsed.  Ignition switch ON signal
a. +B1 is detected to be ON and +B2 is detected  Parking brake switch
to be OFF.  Vehicles speed signal
b. When +B1 is OFF and +B2 is ON,  Engine speed
KOS&OSS-ECU detects that the IOD fuse is
Multi-information display switch operation tone
mounted.
alarm
Engine switch reminder tone alarm (vehicles with  ON signal for multi-information display switch
KOS)
Turn-signal light tone alarm
 Engine switch ON signal
 Turn-signal light switch ON signal
 Driver's door switch ON signal
ETACS-ECU function customize tone alarm
Ignition key reminder tone alarm function (vehi-
 Sounding request signal from the ETACS-ECU
cles without KOS)
 Ignition switch OFF signal A/C operation tone alarm
 Key reminder switch OFF signal  Sounding request signal from the A/C-ECU
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
If the tone alarm does not sound normally, the con- STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read for any
nector(s) and wiring harness in the CAN bus lines, or diagnostic trouble code
the ETACS-ECU or the combination meter may have Check if DTC is set in the engine control module,
a problem. TCM, ASC-ECU, KOS&OSS-ECU, ETACS-ECU or
.
A/C-ECU or heater control unit.
Q: Is the DTC set in the any of the above?
 The combination meter may be defective Set to the engine control module. : Troubleshoot
 The each ECU may be defective the MFI (Refer to GROUP 13A 
Troubleshooting P.13A-47).
DIAGNOSIS Set to the TCM. : Troubleshoot the CVT. Refer to
GROUP 23A  DTC Chart P.23A-16.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the Set to the ASC-ECU. : Troubleshoot the ASC.
CAN bus line Refer to GROUP 35C  Troubleshooting
P.35C-16.
CAUTION
Set to the KOS&OSS-ECU. : Troubleshoot the
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), KOS. Refer to GROUP 42B 
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Troubleshooting P.42B-13.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Set to the ETACS-ECU. : Troubleshoot the ETACS.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to P.54A-218.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to Set to the A/C-ECU. : Troubleshoot the A/C. Refer
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." to GROUP 55B  Troubleshooting P.55B-8.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. The DTC is not set. : Go to Step 4.
position. STEP 4. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special
Function"
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), select "Test" from the
YES : Go to Step 2. special function of the combination meter. Execute
the following item to check the tone alarm.
54C  Troubleshooting P.54C-12).  Item 3: Buzzer(AUTO)
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the YES : Go to Step 5.
combination meter diagnostic trouble code NO : Replace the combination meter, and then go
Check if DTC is set in the combination meter. to Step 5.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Refer to P.54A-18. STEP 5. Retest the system
NO : Go to Step 3.
Check that the tone alarms sound normally.
YES : The procedure is complete. (If no
malfunctions are found in all steps, an
intermittent malfunction is suspected. Refer
to GROUP 00 / How to Cope with
NO : Go to Step 1.
Inspection Procedure 8: Fuel gauge does not work (the other meters work).
.

If only the fuel gauge does not operate, the pump module [fuel
level sensor] or the combination meter may be defective.
.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
 The fuel pump module [fuel level sensor] may be defective.
DIAGNOSIS

meter diagnostic trouble code.
CAUTION
position.
(3) Check if DTC No. B1201 is stored.
Q: Is DTC No. B1201 set?
YES : Perform the troubleshooting of when the DTC is
stored (Refer to P.54A-18).
NO : Go to Step 2.
STEP 2. Check the fuel level sensor

Check to see if the fuel level sensor is normal (Refer to
P.54A-54).
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Replace the fuel level sensor.

 Item 89: Fuel gauge (Refer to P.54A-50).
 Item 8A: Fuel gauge(Target) (Refer to P.54A-50).
YES : Go to Step 4.
5.
STEP 4. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check actuator test

 Item 3: Fuel gauge (Refer to P.54A-51).
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Replace the combination meter, and then go to Step 5

Check that the fuel gauge works normally.
NO : Go to Step 1.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
Inspection Procedure 9: The combination meter light does not illuminate normally or the
multi-information display is not displayed normally.
CAUTION STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read for any

Before replacing the combination meter, be sure diagnostic trouble code.
to check that the power supply circuit, ground Check again if the DTC is set in the engine control
circuit, and communication circuit are normal. module, TCM, ASC-ECU, EPS-ECU,
.
KOS&OSS-ECU, SRS-ECU, ETACS-ECU and

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) A/C-ECU.
When the signal from each ECU is received via the
CAN communication, the combination meter illumi- Q: Is the DTC set in the any of the above?
nates the corresponding display light or warning Set to the engine control module. : Troubleshoot
light, or has the multi information display to display the MFI system. GROUP 13A  DTC Chart
corresponding information. P.13A-47.
If the lights do not illuminate or the multi information Set to the TCM. : Troubleshoot the CVT. Refer to
display does not display normally, the wiring harness GROUP 23A  DTC Chart P.23A-16.
and connector(s) in the CAN bus lines, or the each Set to the ASC-ECU. : Troubleshoot the ASC.
ECU or the combination meter may have a problem. Refer to GROUP 35C  Troubleshooting
P.35C-16.
Set to the EPS-ECU. : Troubleshoot the EPS.
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to GROUP 37  Troubleshooting

 The combination meter may be defective P.37-8.
 The each ECU may be defective Set to the KOS&OSS-ECU. : Troubleshoot the
KOS. Refer to GROUP 42B 
DIAGNOSIS Troubleshooting P.42B-13.
Set to the SRS-ECU. : Troubleshoot the SRS.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the Refer to GROUP 52B  Troubleshooting
CAN bus line P.52B-14.
Set to the ETACS-ECU. : Troubleshoot the
CAUTION
ETACS-ECU. Refer to P.54A-218.
Set to the A/C-ECU. : Troubleshoot the A/C. Refer
to GROUP 55B  Troubleshooting P.55B-8.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- The DTC is not set. : Go to Step 4.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." STEP 4. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Function"
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), select "Test" from the
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) special function of the combination meter. Execute
position. the following item to check the liquid crystal display.
 Item 2: LCD(AUTO)
 Item 5: Illumination (AUTO)
YES : Go to Step 2.
 Item 6: Indicator (AUTO)
54C  Troubleshooting P.54C-12). Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Replace the combination meter, and then go
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the to Step 5.
Check again if the DTC is set in the combination
meter.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Troubleshoot the combination meter (Refer
to P.54A-18).
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

Check that display lights or warning lights are illumi-
nated normally, or multi-information display is dis-
played normally.
YES : The procedure is complete. (If no
malfunctions are found in all steps, an
intermittent malfunction is suspected. Refer
to GROUP 00 / How to Cope with
NO : Go to Step 1.
Inspection Procedure 10: The multi-information display screen cannot be changed with the operation
of the multi-information display switch.
.
CAUTION TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

Before replacing the combination meter, be sure  The multi-information display switch may be
to check that the power supply circuit, ground defective
circuit, and communication circuit are normal.  The combination meter may be defective
.

When the signal from the multi-information display
switch is received, the combination meter switches
the multi-information display screen. If the multi infor-
mation display screen does not switch normally, the
multi-information display switch, wiring harness, con-
nector(s), or combination meter may have a problem.
DIAGNOSIS

meter diagnostic trouble code.
CAUTION
position.
YES : Troubleshoot the combination meter (Refer to
P.54A-18).
NO : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 2. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special Function"

 Item 2: LCD (AUTO) (Refer to P.54A-51).
YES : Go to Step 3.
3.

Check that the multi-information display screen works nor-
mally.
NO : Go to Step 1.
Inspection Procedure 11: Parking brake reminder tone alarm does not sound.
Inspection Procedure 12: Brake warning light does not illuminate.
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
Before replacing the combination meter, be sure
to check that the power supply circuit, ground STEP 1. Check the speedometer.
circuit, and communication circuit are normal. Check that the speedometer in the combination
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) meter operates normally.

If the parking reminder tone alarm does not sound or Q: Is the check result normal?
the brake warning light does not come on at a speed YES : Go to Step 2.
above 8 km/h with the parking brake switch ON, the NO : Troubleshoot the combination meter. Refer
parking brake switch input circuit, the vehicle speed to P.54A-38.
signal circuit, the combination meter, the wiring har-
ness or its connector may be defective. STEP 2. Check the parking brake switch.
.
Refer to GROUP 36  On-vehicle Service, Parking
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Brake Switch Check P.36-6.
 The vehicle speed signal circuit may be defec- Q: Is the check result normal?
tive. YES : Go to Step 3.
 The parking brake switch may be defective. NO : Replace the parking brake switch.
 The wiring harness or connectors may have
STEP 3. Check of short to power supply, and
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
open circuit in BRK line between combination
meter connector and parking brake switch
connector.
YES : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 4. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special STEP 5. Retest the system.
Function" The parking brake reminder tone alarm function
Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), select "Test" from the should work normally.
special function of the combination meter. Execute Q: Is the check result normal?
the following item to check the tone alarm and the liq- YES : The procedure is complete. (If no
uid crystal display. malfunctions are found in all steps, an
 Item 3: Buzzer (AUTO) intermittent malfunction is suspected. Refer
 Item 6: Indicator (AUTO) to GROUP 00 / How to Cope with
Q: Is the check result normal? Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13).
YES : Go to Step 5. NO : Go to Step 1.
NO : Replace the combination meter, and then go
to Step 5.
Inspection Procedure 13: Ambient temperature sensor does not work.

.

Before replacing the combination meter, be sure  The ambient temperature sensor circuit may be
to check that the power supply circuit, ground defective.
circuit, and communication circuit are normal.  The combination meter may be defective.
.

When the ambient temperature sensor does not
work, the ambient temperature sensor circuit, the
ambient temperature sensor may be defective.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check the ambient temperature sensor.

Refer to GROUP 55B  Inspection, Ambient Temperature Sen-
sor Check P.55B-46.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the ambient temperature sensor.
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at the ambient

temperature sensor connector
(1) Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor connector, the
measure at the harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the Disconnect the
ambient temperature sensor connector, the measure at the
harness side. connector (SENG terminal) and ground.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in SENG line between

ambient temperature sensor connector and combination
meter connector.
YES : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in AMB line between

combination meter connector and ambient temperature
sensor connector.
YES : Go to Step 5.

Check that the ambient temperature sensor circuit works nor-
mally.
YES : The procedure is complete.
Inspection Procedure 14: Seat belt reminder function does not work normally.

Before replacing the combination meter, be sure  The seat belt switch (driver’s side) may be defec-
to check that the power supply circuit, ground tive.
circuit, and communication circuit are normal.  The seat belt switch (passenger’s side) may be
.
defective.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT)  The combination meter may be defective.
If the seat belt reminder function does not work nor-  The passenger’s air bag OFF indicator light
mally, the seat belt switch input circuit, the combina- assembly may be defective.
tion meter or passenger’s air bag OFF indicator light  The wiring harness or connectors may have
assembly may be defective. loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
.
DIAGNOSIS
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

line
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP 54C 
Troubleshooting P.54C-12).
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the SRS

Check if DTC is stored in the SRS-ECU.
YES : Diagnose the SRS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 52B 
Troubleshooting P.52B-14).
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check the seat belt switch.

Refer to GROUP 52A  Front Seat Belt P.52A-28.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Replace the seat belt switch.
STEP 4. Resistance measurement at the seat belt switch

(driver’s side) connector
harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the seat belt switch
(driver’s side) connector and ground.
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or less.
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 5.
STEP 5. Check of open circuit in ground line between seat

belt switch (driver’s side) and ground.
Troubleshooting/inspection Service Points  How to
NO : Repair the wiring harness.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
STEP 6. Check of short to power supply circuit in S/B line

between combination meter connector and seat belt
switch (driver’s side) connector.
YES : Go to Step 7.
STEP 7. Check of short to power supply, and open circuit

in BWLP line between combination meter connector and
passenger’s air bag OFF indicator light assembly
connector.
YES : Go to Step 8.

The seat belt reminder function should work normally.
YES <The seat belt reminder function works normally.> :
The trouble can be an intermittent malfunction (Refer
NO <Tone alarm sounds do not sound.> : Replace the
combination meter.
NO <The indicator (driver’s side) does not illuminate.> :
Replace the combination meter.
NO <The indicator (passenger’s side) does not
illuminate.> : Replace the passenger’s air bag OFF
indicator light assembly.
SERVICE DATA
M1540201001119
The following items of the ECU input data can be
read using scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
Item No. Check item scan tool display Check condition Normal condition
89 Fuel gauge Fuel gauge Fuel gauge unit resistance value and scan tool
displayed value agree with each other. (Tolerance
is 2 ohms)
8A Fuel gauge(Target) Fuel gauge(Target) Fuel gauge and scan tool displayed values agree
with each other.
90 Odometer Odometer Odometer displayed value and scan tool displayed
value agree with each other.
94 Power source Power source voltage Always 0 to 20 V
voltage
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
ACTUATOR TEST TABLE

M1540201101008
Item No. Item name Test item Driven content

1* Speedometer Pointer setting () Value that is set
with scan tool is
2 Tachometer Pointer setting (r/min)
shown on the
3 Fuel gauge Status setting (ohm) combination meter.
5 Meter illumination Status setting (%)
NOTE: *: Depending on the main scale of the speed-
ometer, the unit that can be tested changes. Unit is
displayed as "" on the scan tool screen.
SPECIAL FUNCTION TABLE
M1540213300017
TEST
Item No. Item name Test content
2 LCD (AUTO) The multi information display screen changes by looping in the
following order.
1. A black full screen is displayed.
2. The version information is displayed.
3. A white full screen is displayed.
4. A screen with black and white gradation is displayed.
3 Buzzer (AUTO) The tone alarm sounds.
4 Pointer (AUTO) Makes the speedometer and tachometer sweep from zero to full
scale.
5 Illumination (AUTO) Makes the meter needles, the instrument face plate, the
variable-dimming LED indicator and the LCD screen back light
sweep 0% to 100% and vice versa.
6 Indicator (AUTO) Toggles all of the LED indicators ON and OFF.
TURN-SIGNAL SOUND CUSTOMIZATION
Item No. Item name Test content
1 Signal sound setting Customizing turn-signal sound
CHECK AT COMBINATION METER TERMINALS

M1540201200712
Connector: C-108
ACB04735AB
Termin Terminal Check item Check condition Normal condition

al No. code
1 B+B ECU power supply (battery) Always Battery positive
voltage
2 IG1 ECU power supply (Ignition Ignition switch: ON Battery positive
switch: IG1) voltage
Ignition switch: OFF 1 V or less
3    
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
Termin Terminal Check item Check condition Normal condition

al No. code
4 BRK Parking brake switch input Parking brake switch: ON 1 V or less
Parking brake switch: OFF Battery positive
voltage
5 S/B Seat belt switch (driver’s side) Seat belt switch (driver’s side): 1 V or less
input ON
Seat belt switch (driver’s side): Battery positive
OFF voltage
6    
7 AMB Ambient temp input Outside temperature: -40C Approximately 4.8
(-40F) V
Outside temperature: 0C (32F) Approximately 3.4
V
Outside temperature: 25C (77F) Approximately 1.9
V
Outside temperature: 50C Approximately 0.9
(122F) V
8    
9 LVL Brake fluid level sensor Parking brake switch: ON 1V or less
Parking brake switch: OFF Battery positive
voltage
10 to 11    
12 SENG Ambient temp ground Always 1 V or less
13 GND Ground (sensor) Always 1 V or less
14 CANH CAN H  
15 CANL CAN L  
16, 17    
18 F/G Input of fuel gauge Fuel: FULL Approximately 1 V
Fuel: EMPTY Approximately 8 V
19 BWLP Passenger’s seat belt warning  
light (passenger’s air bag OFF
indicator light assembly)
output
20 SPEED Vehicle speed signal output Vehicle speed: Approximately 40 Approximately
km/h (25 mph) 28Hz
21 GND1 Ground (ECU) Always 1 V or less
22 PWM Illumination () output Always 1 V or less
23 ILL+ Illumination (+) output With lighting control Battery positive
voltage
24    
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
SPEEDOMETER CHECK
M1540201400910
CAUTION
 Since the DTC may be stored in the ASC-ECU when
checking the speedometer with speedometer tester,
erase the DTC.
 Do not accelerate or decelerate suddenly during servic-
ing work.
1. Adjust the pressure of tires to the specified level (Refer to
GROUP 31, On-vehicle Service P.31-41).
2. Press the ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds or more to stop the
ASC operation.
3. Set the vehicle onto a speedometer tester and use wheel
chocks to hold the rear wheels.
Free roller
Speedometer tester
AC106044 AO
4. To prevent front wheel lateral runout or vehicle sudden start,

Tension bar attach a chain or wire to the front and rear towing hooks and
fix the other end of the chain or wire to the anchor plate.
5. Check that the speedometer indicating range is within the
Front standard value and the needle fluctuation is within the limit
value.
Standard value <Vehicles for USA>:
Standard indication {mph Indication tolerance {mph

Anchor plate AC001288AC (km/h)} (km/h)}
25 (40) 23.5  26.5 (40.5  44.5)
50 (80) 48.5  51.5 (81.5  86.5)
75 (120) 73.5  76.5 (122.5  128.5)
100 (160) 98.5  102.5 (162.5  169.5)
Standard value <Vehicles for CANADA>:
standard indication {km/h Indication tolerance {km/h

(mph)} (mph)}
40 (25) 40.5  44.5 (25.5  28.5)
80 (50) 81.5  86.5 (50.5  53.5)
120 (75) 122.5  128.5 (76.0  78.0)
160 (100) 162.5  169.5 (101.5 
106.5)
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
6. If not within the standard value, check the tire size. If an

incorrect size of tire is used, replace it and check again. If
the tire size is correct, a defect may be present in
components and circuit between the ASC and the
combination meter. Check the following items.
 ASC (Refer to GROUP 35C, Diagnosis P.35C-16).
 Combination meter (refer to P.54A-18).
TACHOMETER CHECK
M1540201500531
When the actuator tests (item No.2) are performed using scan
tool (M.U.T.-III), check that the tachometer indication tolerance
is within the standard value.
Standard value:
Engine speed (r/min) Tachometer indicating

tolerance (r/min)
700 600  800
3,000 2,850  3,150
5,000 4,750  5,250
6,000 5,700  6,300
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CHECK M1540201600936

.
NOMINAL RESISTANCE OF THE FUEL LEVEL

SENSOR
1. Remove the fuel pump module (Refer to GROUP 13B 
On-Vehicle Service P.13B-7).
2. When float of the fuel level sensor is in stopper positions F
Fuel gauge (+) and E, ensure that resistance between the fuel level sensor
Ground
terminal and ground terminal is within the standard value.
Standard value:
Float position Gauge resistance

value (ohms)
Stopper position "F" 13.0  1.0
Stopper position "E" 120.0  1.0
Stopper position "F"
3. When the float is moved slowly between stopper positions
"F" and "E", ensure that the resistance is smoothly
changing.
Stopper position "E"

ACB03617AB
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FLOAT HEIGHT

1. Remove the fuel pump module (Refer to GROUP 13B 
On-Vehicle Service P.13B-7).
2. When float is moved to contact the float arm on the stopper,
Stopper point "F"
ensure that stopper positions "F" (height A) and "E" (height
B) are within the standard value.
Standard value:
Float position Float height {mm (in)}

Stopper point "E"
A Stopper position "F" 135.4  5.0 (5.3  0.2)
B
(height A)
Stopper position "E" 14.9  5.0 (0.6  0.2)
ACB03364 AB
(height B)
SERVICE REMINDER FUNCTION SET

M1540208200735
HOW TO SET BY OPERATING THE SCAN the current status (schedule, driving distance and
TOOL (M.U.T.-III) elapsed days).
1. Extra reminder setting
CAUTION
2. Extra reminder cancel
 If the combination meter needs to be
3. Periodic reminder schedule set
replaced, the current driving distance and
elapsed days must be entered into the meter 4. Integrated value adjustment
after the replacement in order to be used for 5. Optional INT schedule setting
service reminder function. Therefore, read
"Integrated mileage for reminder," "Integrated
days for reminder," "Mileage until Extra
reminder," "Months until Extra reminder," and
"Current schedule" from the meter before the
replacement using the special function of the
scan tool (M.U.T.-III), and note them. If "Inte-
grated mileage for reminder" or "Integrated
days for reminder" cannot be read from the
meter using the scan tool (M.U.T.-III), use the
following method.
a. As for the driving distance for check warn-
ing, use the driving distance displayed on
the multi information display.
b. As for the elapsed days for check warning,
calculate the number of elapsed days from
the delivery date to the customer (service
reminder function start date) and current
date.
 After the service reminder function has
started, when the elapsed days for check
warning is reset for the vehicle whose battery
is removed for a long period (15 days or
more), calculate the elapsed days from the
delivery date to the customer (service
reminder function start date) and the current
date, and then input it.
Using the scan tool (M.U.T.-III), the following service
reminder functions can be set. Before setting, check
.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
HOW TO OPERATE THE SCAN TOOL (M.U.T.-III)

CAUTION
If the combination meter has not started to calculate the
elapsed time yet, follow steps "a" to "d" to activate the cal-
culation beforehand.
a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
b. Press the multi-information display switch to display
the service reminder on the multi-information display.
c. Press and hold the multi-information display switch for
at least one second until the service reminder indicator
flashes.
d. While the indicator is flashing, press the switch briefly
(within one second).
1. Connect the scan tool (M.U.T.-III) to the data link connector.
2. Start the scan tool system on the PC and turn the ignition
switch to the "ON" position.
3. Select "Meter" on the "System Select" screen, and press the
"OK" button.
4. Select "Special Function" on the next screen.
5. Select "Service Reminder" on the "Special function" screen.
DBA-CW5WXTHHZ1 2006MY - Service Reminder - 401430898
6. Select the function to be executed from "Function List."
Meter Special Function
Function List
Service Reminder
Data List
 3 Extra reminder setting (Refer to P.54A-56).
No. Name No. Name Value
 4 Extra reminder cancel (Refer to P.54A-57).
 5 Periodic reminder schedule set (Refer to P.54A-57).
3 Extra reminder setting 1 Mileage until reminder 7500 mile
4 Extra reminder cancel
 6 Integrated value adjustment (Refer to P.54A-58).

2 Months until reminder 6 month
5 Periodic reminder schedule set
Integrated value adjustment Mileage until Extra

6 4
 7 Optional INT schedule setting (Refer to P.54A-59).

reminder
7 Optional INT schedule setting Months until Extra
5 reminder
7 Current Schedule Normal

.
Click the name of item to execute, and press Integrated mileage

the OK button.
8 for reminder 26 mile
1. EXTRA REMINDER SETTING
In addition to the current warning period, the temporary service
AC602555AQ reminder warning period can be set.
NOTE: Prior to this Extra reminder setting, execute the Extra
reminder cancel and the Periodic reminder schedule set
(including the case that it is not necessary to change the
schedule).
DBA-CW5WXTHHZ1 2006MY - Service Reminder - 4014308A4
1. On the "Service Reminder" screen, select "3 Extra reminder
Meter
Selected
Special Function Service Reminder
Data List
setting."
3 Extra reminder setting
Item
Set value
No.
1
Name
Mileage until reminder

Value
7500 mile
NOTE: The screen indicates that the temporary warning
Name Value
Distance to setting point -Input the value- 2 Months until reminder 6 month
period (Nos. 4 and 5 in the data list) has not been set.
Months to setting point -Input the value- Mileage until Extra
4 reminder
Months until Extra

5 reminder
Input the value for the item that you want to

set up, and press the OK button.
AC602556 CJ
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

2. Set the temporary warning period (distance or month) of the
Meter
Selected
"Set value."
Item
Set value NOTE: Either input of distance or month can execute the
Name Value
Distance to setting point -Input the value- setting.
7 8 9
Months to setting point 2
4 5 6 Tab
3. Press the "OK" button.
Back
1 2 3
Space
Input the value for the item that you want to 0 Clear
Range: 0-254, Unit: month,
AC602557 AR

4. The temporary warning period is set.
Meter Special Function Service Reminder
Selected
Data List NOTE: The screen indicates that "2 month" has been added
Item No.
1
Name

Value
7500 mile
to the temporary warning period (No. 5 in the data list). (The
distance of No. 4 in the data list has not been set).
Mileage until Extra
4 reminder .
Months until Extra

5 reminder
2 month
2. EXTRA REMINDER CANCEL
Check the result.
The temporary service reminder warning period which has
been set can be cancelled.
AC602558DE

1. On the "Service Reminder" screen, select "4 Extra reminder
Meter
Selected
Data List
cancel."
4 Extra reminder cancel
Item No.
1
Name Value
Mileage until reminder 7500 mile

NOTE: The screen indicates that "3000 mile" and "2 month"
have been set to the temporary warning period (Nos. 4 and
4
Mileage until Extra
reminder
3000 mile 5 in the data list).
Months until Extra
5 reminder
2 month
Press the OK button to execute.
AC602558DF

3. The temporary warning period is cancelled.
Selected
4 Extra reminder cancel Data List NOTE: The screen indicates that the temporary warning
Item No.
1
Name

Value
7500 mile
period (Nos. 4 and 5 in the data list) has been cancelled.
.
4
Mileage until Extra
reminder
Months until Extra

3. PERIODIC REMINDER SCHEDULE SET
5 reminder
The service reminder schedule can be changed.
Check the result. NOTE: In addition to the operation of the scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
the schedule can be changed by operating the meter informa-
AC602558DG
tion switch on the combination meter. Refer to P.54A-60.

1. On the "Service Reminder" screen, select "5 Periodic
Meter
Selected
Periodic reminder Data List
reminder schedule set."
5
Item schedule set
Set value
No.
1
Name Value

NOTE: The screen indicates that the current schedule (No.
Name Value
Schedule Spec. -Select the value- 2 Months until reminder 6 month
7 in the data list) has been set to "Normal."
Mileage until Extra
4 reminder
Months until Extra

5 reminder
Select the value and press the OK button.
AC602556 CK
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER

2. Set the schedule to be changed from "Set value."
Meter
Selected
5
Item schedule set
No. Name Value
Set value
1 Mileage until reminder 7500 mile
Name Value
Schedule Spec. NAS 10 2 Months until reminder 6 month
Mileage until Extra

4 reminder
Months until Extra

5 reminder
Select the value and press the OK button.
AC602556 CL

4. The schedule is changed.
Selected
5
NOTE: The screen indicates that the current schedule (No.
Item schedule set
No.
1
Name Value

7 in the data list) has been changed to "NAS 10."
2 Months until reminder 6 month .
4
Mileage until Extra
reminder
Months until Extra

4. INTEGRATED VALUE ADJUSTMENT
5
7
reminder
Current Schedule NAS 10

At the combination meter replacement or for the vehicle with its
Check the result.
battery being removed for a long period (15 days or more), this
adjustment is used to reset the mileage and elapsed days for
check warning.
AC602558 DH

1. On the "Service Reminder" screen, select "6 Integrated
Meter
Selected
Integrated value Data List
value adjustment."
6
Item adjustment
Set value
No.
1
Name

Value
7500 mile
NOTE: The screen indicates that the current mileage and
Name Value
Running Distance -Input the value- 2 Months until reminder 6 month
elapsed days (Nos. 8 and 9 in the data list) are "26 mile" and
Elapsed Days -Input the value-
4
Mileage until Extra
reminder
"0 day."
Months until Extra
5
reminder
Integrated mileage for

8 reminder
26 mile
Input the value to both items, and press the Integrated days for
9 0 day
OK button. reminder
AC602556 CM

2. To "Set value," input the mileage and elapsed days to be
Meter
Selected
Integrated value
reset.
6
Item adjustment
Set value NOTE: Always input both the mileage and elapsed days.
Name Value
Running Distance 100
7 8 9
Elapsed Days 30
4 5 6 Tab
Back
1 2 3
Space
Input the value to both items, and press the 0 Clear

OK button.
Range: 0-32767, Unit: day,
AC602557 AF

4. The mileage and elapsed days are changed. The
Meter
Selected
Integrated value Data List
combination meter automatically recalculates the distance
6
Item adjustment
No. Name Value
and days to the nearest next check from the settings of
1 Mileage until reminder 7400 mile

mileage and elapsed days for check warning, and then
4 Mileage until Extra displays them in "Data List."
reminder
5 Months until Extra

reminder NOTE: .
8
reminder
100 mile
 The screen indicates that the current mileage and
Integrated days for
Check the result. 9 reminder
30 day
elapsed days (Nos. 8 and 9 in the data list) have been
changed to "100 mile" and "30 day."
AC602558 DI
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
 Set the elapsed days for check warning to "0 day" by the
above resetting method, thereby the timer is reset indi-
rectly.
.
5. OPTIONAL INT SCHEDULE SETTING

CAUTION
If the current schedule is set to the "Optional INT" by exe-
cuting "5. Periodic reminder schedule set," the "set value"
cannot be input. Therefore, set it to the schedule other
than the "Optional INT" once, and then execute "7.
Optional INT schedule setting."
In addition to the existing schedule, the optional service
reminder schedule can be set.
1. On the "Service Reminder" screen, select "7 Optional INT
Meter
Selected
Optional INT schedule Data List
schedule setting."
7
Item setting
Set value
No.
1
Name

Value
7500 mile
NOTE: The screen indicates that the optional schedule
Name Value
Optional INT for mileage -Input the value- 2 Months until reminder 6 month
(Nos. 12 and 13 in the data list) has not been set.
Optional INT for month -Input the value- Integrated mileage for
8 reminder
26 mile
Integrated days for

9 0 day
reminder
Optional interval for

12 mileage
Input the value for the item that you want to Optional interval for
13 month
AC602556 CN

2. Set the optional schedule (distance or month) of the "Set
Meter
Selected
Optional INT schedule
value."
7
Item setting
Set value NOTE: Either input of distance or month can execute the
Name Value
Optional INT for mileage -Input the value- setting.
7 8 9
Optional INT for month 2
4 5 6 Tab
Back
1 2 3
Space
Input the value for the item that you want to 0 Clear
Range: 0-254, Unit: month,
AC602557 AG

4. The optional schedule is set. The set schedule becomes
Meter
Selected
Optional INT schedule Data List
effective by executing "5 Periodic reminder schedule set"
7
Item setting
No. Name Value
and setting the schedule to "Optional INT."
1 Mileage until reminder
2 Months until reminder 2 month NOTE: The screen indicates that "2 month" has been added
8
reminder
26 mile to the optional schedule (No. 13 in the data list). (The dis-
9
Integrated days for
reminder
0 day
tance of No. 12 in the data list has not been set).
Check the result.
Optional interval for
Please set up "Optional INT" in "Periodic 12 mileage
inspection schedule set" function.
When you start the service reminder at this Optional interval for
interval setting. 13 month
2 month
AC604401AC
HOW TO SET BY SPECIAL OPERATION

.
OF SWITCH
By operating the meter information switch of the
combination meter, the service reminder warning
cancellation and the schedule setting can be per-
formed.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
HOW TO CANCEL THE SERVICE HOW TO SET THE SCHEDULE

REMINDER WARNING 1. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
CAUTION 2. By operating the multi-information display switch,
 Be careful not to execute the service reminder the warning period is displayed on the odometer.
warning cancellation by operating the switch 3. Press the multi-information display switch once
again after erasing the service reminder warn- for 1.0 seconds or longer.
ing indicator which is currently output, 4. The service reminder indicator flashes.
because the next warning period will be can- 5. While the service reminder indicator flashes,
celled. press the multi-information display switch for 1.0
 If the next warning period is cancelled by mis- seconds or longer and 3 times consecutively.
take, the cancelled warning period can be 6. The service reminder indicator is turned ON, and
restored by setting a schedule different from the current schedule is displayed on the odometer
the current one once, and then returning it to display.
the previous schedule.
7. While the current schedule is displayed, press the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
multi-information display switch for less than 1.0
2. By operating the multi-information display switch, seconds and 3 times consecutively.
the warning period is displayed on the odometer.
8. The odometer display is shifted to the schedule
3. Press the multi-information display switch once selection mode.
for 1.0 seconds or longer.
9. When the multi-information display switch is
4. The service reminder indicator flashes. pressed for less than 1.0 seconds, the schedule is
5. While the service reminder indicator flashes, shifted, and when the switch is pressed for 1.0
press the multi-information display switch once for seconds or longer, the displayed schedule is set.
less than 1.0 seconds. NOTE: For schedule, "JPN", "EU", "NAS",
6. The service reminder indicator is turned ON, and "GCC/EXP", "MMAL" and "SEVERE" can also be
"CLEAR" is displayed on the odometer display for selected. However, the using shall be for "Normal"
3 seconds. only.
7. After "CLEAR" is displayed for 3 seconds, the 10.The schedule set in Step 9 is displayed for 3
warning period to the next time is displayed. seconds, and the warning period to the next time
.
is displayed.
.
SCHEDULE TABLE
Schedule Contents of schedule
Normal Elapsed time (month) Every 6 elapsed months
Driving distance (miles) Every 7,500 miles of driving distance
Driving distance (km) Every 12,000 km of driving distance
HOW TO INACTIVATE THE SERVICE When "Function OFF" is selected

REMINDER FUNCTION  Even when the check warning period is reached,
the service reminder display is not displayed.
By setting to "OFF Display" or "Function OFF" when
 Even with the multi-information display switch
the schedule is set, the service reminder function can
operation, the service reminder screen is not dis-
be inactivated.
played.
When "OFF Display" is selected
 Even if the service reminder screen is displayed
by operating the multi-information display switch,
"OFF" is displayed.
TSB Revision
COMBINATION METER
COMBINATION METER
M1540201700524
CAUTION
When the combination meter is required to be replaced, the current driving distance and number of
elapsed days must be entered into the meter after the replacement in order to be used for service
reminder function. Therefore, read "Integrated mileage for reminder," "Integrated days for reminder,"
"Mileage until Extra reminder," "Months until Extra reminder," and "Current Schedule" from the meter
before the replacement using the special function of scan tool (M.U.T.-III), and note them. For the
operation method of scan tool (M.U.T.-III), refer to P.54A-55. If "Integrated mileage for reminder" or
"Integrated days for reminder" cannot be read by the scan tool (M.U.T.-III), follow the method
described below.
 For the driving distance for check warning, use the driving distance displayed on the multi infor-
mation display.
 For the elapsed days for check warning, calculate the number of elapsed days from the delivery
date to the customer (service remainder function start date) and current date.
ACC03246AB

1. Combination meter bezel 3. Engine switch <Vehicles with
2. Combination meter assembly KOS>
4. Plug <Vehicles without KOS>
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

M1540201800286
1
2
ACB03309AB
Disassembly steps
1. Combination meter glass
2. Combination meter
HEADLIGHT
M1540100200466
Item Standard value Limit

Headlight aiming Low-beam Vertical Horizontal line (H)  50.5 
[at 7.62 m (25.0 ft)] direction mm ( 2.0 inches) ( 0.38
degrees angle)
Horizontal  126.4 mm ( 5.0 inches) 
direction ( 0.95 degrees angle)
from the axis, which is
266.1 mm (10.5 inches) (2
degrees angle) rightward
from the vertical line (V)
Headlight intensity cd (at high-beam)  40,000 or more {when a screen
is set 18.3m(60 ft) ahead of the
vehicle}
PRECAUTIONS ON HOW TO USE THE HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY
Be careful with the following items as resin lenses  Don't tape the outer lens.
are used in the headlight assembly.  Don't scratch the outer lens surface with a sharp
 Don't illuminate the headlight for three minutes or edged special tool.
more when the headlight is covered with scratch  Use the specified genuine bulb.
protector.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1540104400354

name
a a. MB992744  DTC, service data and actuator test
b. MB992745 check.
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

name
a
b pushing V.C.I. DTC, service data and actuator test
f. MB991825
ENTER key. check.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING
M1540104200338
Refer to GROUP 00, How to use Troubleshoot-
ing/inspection Service Points, Troubleshooting Con-
tents P.00-6.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
M1540104300391

(V.C.I.-Lite)
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
CAUTION
Data link connector
position.
MB992745, MB991910
MB992744, MB991824
MB992747, MB992748, MB991827 ACC02853 AB
color.

TROUBLE CODES
(V.C.I.-Lite)
not be stored. Check the battery if scan tool (M.U.T.-III) does
not display.
button.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT


(V.C.I.-Lite)
"OK" button.
M1540101400797
CAUTION
On troubleshooting, if the ignition switch is turned ON while disconnecting connector(s), DTC(s)
associated with other system may be stored. On completion, confirm all systems for DTC(s). If DTC(s)
are stored, erase them all.

B1706 Flasher fuse Detection of turn-signal light (blown fuse) P.54A-68
blown
B1707 Flasher open Detection of turn-signal light (open circuit) P.54A-69
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
DTC B1706: Flasher fuse blown

.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The fuse may be defective
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  The ETACS-ECU may be defective
communication circuit are normal.  The wiring harness or connectors may have
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-

If the flasher fuse is broken, the ETACS-ECU stores
DTC B1706.
DIAGNOSIS
 MB992006: Extra fine probe
 MB991223: Harness set
STEP 1. Check the flasher fuse.

Q: Is the fuse in good condition?
YES : Go to Step 2P.54A-68.
NO : Check the flasher fuse. (Refer to GROUP 00  How
to use Troubleshooting/inspection Service Points 
Inspection service point for blown fuse P.00-15.) Then
go to Step 3.
STEP 2. Check of open circuit in HAZ1 line between the

ETACS-ECU connector and the fusible link.
YES : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Check whether the

diagnostic trouble code is stored again.
CAUTION
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to connect
(3) Erase the DTC.
position.
(5) Check whether the ETACS-ECU DTC is stored.
YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
NO : The trouble can be an intermittent malfunction (Refer
DTC B1707: Flasher open

.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The turn-signal light bulb may be defective
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  The headlight assembly may be defective
communication circuit are normal.  The rear combination light assembly may be
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) defective

 The ETACS-ECU may be defective
When the turn-signal light bulb is blown, or connec-
tor(s) or wiring harness between the ETACS-ECU,
the turn-signal light which does not illuminate and
ground is defective, the ETACS-ECU sets DTC
B1707.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Confirm which turn-signal light is defective.

Q: Which turn-signal light fails to illuminate correctly?
Front turn-signal light : Go to Step 2.
Side turn-signal light : Go to Step 7.
Rear turn-signal light : Go to Step 12.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 2. Check the bulb(s) of the front turn-signal lights.

Check the bulb(s) of the defective light.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Replace the bulb(s) of the defective light. Go to Step
17.
STEP 3. Resistance measurement at the front turn-signal

light (LH) connector or front turn-signal light (RH)
connector.
harness side.
(2) Resistance measurement between the defective light
connector terminal and ground.
 Measure the resistance between the front turn-signal
light (LH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground.
 Measure the resistance between the front turn-signal
light (RH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in ground line between front

turn-signal light (LH) connector or front turn-signal light
(RH) connector and ground.
Cope with Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13). Go to
Step 17.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. Go to Step
17.
STEP 5. Check of open circuit in TURN LH or TURN RH line

between front turn-signal light (LH) connector or front
turn-signal light (RH) connector and ETACS-ECU
connector.
YES : Go to Step 6.
17.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

Check that the front turn-signal lights illuminate normally.
Step 17.
NO : Replace the front turn-signal light. Go to Step 17.
STEP 7. Check the bulb(s) of side turn-signal lights.

YES : Go to Step 8.
17.
STEP 8. Resistance measurement at the side turn-signal

light (LH) connector, side turn-signal light (RH) connector
<Fender panel type>, door mirror assembly (LH) connector
or door mirror assembly (RH) connector <Door mirror
type>.
harness side.
 Measure the resistance between the side turn-signal
light (LH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
<Fender panel type>.
light (RH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
 Measure the resistance between the door mirror assem-
bly (LH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
<Door mirror type>.
bly (RH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
<Door mirror type>.
YES : Go to Step 10.
NO : Go to Step 9.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 9. Check of open circuit in ground line between side

turn-signal light (LH) connector, side turn-signal light (RH)
connector <Fender panel type>, door mirror assembly (LH)
connector or door mirror assembly (RH) connector <Door
mirror type> and ground.
17.
STEP 10. Check of open circuit in TURN LH or TURN RH

line between side turn-signal light (LH) connector, side
turn-signal light (RH) connector <Fender panel type>, door
mirror assembly (LH) connector or door mirror assembly
(RH) connector <Door mirror type> and ETACS-ECU
connector.
17.

Check that the side turn-signal lights illuminate normally.
Step 17.
NO : Replace the side turn-signal light <Fender panel
type>, side turn-signal light assembly (Refer to
GROUP 51  Door Mirror P.51-68) <Door mirror
type>. Go to Step 17.
STEP 12. Check the bulb(s) of rear turn-signal lights.

17.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 13. Resistance measurement at the rear combination

light (turn: LH) or rear combination light (turn: RH)
connector.
harness side.
 Measure the resistance between the side rear combina-
tion light (turn: LH) connector (ground terminal) and the
ground.
 Measure the resistance between the side rear combina-
tion light (turn: RH) connector (ground terminal) and the
ground.
NO : Go to Step 14.
STEP 14. Check of open circuit in ground line between rear

combination light (turn: LH) connector or rear combination
light (turn: RH) connector and ground.
Step 17.
17.
STEP 15. Check of open circuit in TURN LH or TURN RH

line between rear combination light (turn: LH) connector or
rear combination light (turn: RH) connector and
ETACS-ECU connector.
17.

Check that the rear turn-signal lights illuminate normally.
Step 17.
NO : Replace the rear combination light. Go to Step 17.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 17. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Check whether the

diagnostic trouble code is set again.
CAUTION
(3) Erase the DTC.
position.
(5) Check whether the ETACS-ECU DTC is set.
Q: Is the DTC set?
M1540102101350

Procedure No. page
Headlight and position light None of the low-beam headlights illuminate. A-1 P.54A-75
None of the high-beam headlights illuminate. A-2 P.54A-76
The high-beam and low-beam headlights do not A-3 P.54A-78
illuminate when the passing switch is operated.
One of the headlights does not illuminate. A-4 P.54A-79
The high-beam indicator light does not A-5 P.54A-80
illuminate.
The headlight automatic-shutdown function A-6 P.54A-81
does not work normally.
The position light does not illuminate. A-7 P.54A-82
Either of the position lights does not illuminate. A-8 P.54A-83
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON A-9 P.54A-85
position with the lighting switch at the OFF or
TAIL position, the headlights will illuminate
briefly.
Daytime running light function does not work A-10 P.54A-87
normally.
Turn-signal light None of the turn-signal lights illuminate. B-1 P.54A-88
The comfort flasher does not work normally. B-2 P.54A-89
The turn-signal indicator lights do not illuminate. B-3 P.54A-90
One of the turn-signal lights does not illuminate. B-4 P.54A-91
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure A-1: None of the low-beam headlights illuminate.

.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The headlight relay (LO) may be defective
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  The column switch may be defective
communication circuit are normal.  The ETACS-ECU may be defective

.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) The wiring harness or connectors may have

If none of headlights (low-beam) illuminates, the
headlight switch input circuit, headlight relay (LO), or
ETACS-ECU may have a problem.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the diagnostic

trouble code.
CAUTION
(3) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is stored.
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU. Refer to ETACS,
Diagnosis P.54A-218.
NO : Go to Step 2.

Check the input signal from the headlight (low-beam) switch.
 Column switch (lighting switch): HEAD
Item Item name Normal condition
No.
60 Headlight output ON

YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to ETACS,
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 3. Check the headlight relay (LO).

Refer to P.54A-99.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Replace the headlight relay (LO).
STEP 4. Voltage measurement at headlight relay (LO)

connector.
(1) Remove the headlight relay (LO), and measure at the relay
box side.
(2) Measure the voltage between the headlight relay (LO)
connectors (power supply terminal) and the ground.
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 5.

in power supply lines between headlight relay (LO)
connector and fusible link.
STEP 6. Check of open circuit in H/LP LO line between

headlight relay (LO) connector and ETACS-ECU connector.
YES : Go to Step 7.

Check that the low-beam headlights illuminate normally.
NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
Inspection Procedure A-2: None of the high-beam headlights illuminate.

.
CAUTION
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the
communication circuit are normal.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

If none of headlights (high-beam) illuminates, the  The headlight relay (HI) may be defective
headlight switch input circuit, headlight relay (HIGH),  The column switch may be defective
or ETACS-ECU may have a problem.  The ETACS-ECU may be defective
.
DIAGNOSIS

trouble code.
CAUTION
NO : Go to Step 2.

Check the input signal from the dimmer switch.
 Column switch (dimmer/passing): ON
No.
61 Headlight HI output ON

YES : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check the headlight relay (HI).

Refer to P.54A-99.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Replace the headlight relay (HI).
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 4. Voltage measurement at headlight relay (HI)

connector.
(1) Remove the headlight relay (HI), and measure at the relay
box side.
(2) Measure the voltage between the headlight relay (HI)
connector (power supply terminal) and the ground.
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 5.

in power supply lines between headlight relay (HI)
connector and fusible link.
STEP 6. Check of open circuit in H/LP HI line between

headlight relay (HI) connector and ETACS-ECU connector.
YES : Go to Step 7.

Check that the high-beam headlights illuminate normally.
Inspection Procedure A-3: The high-beam and low-beam headlights do not illuminate when the
passing switch is operated.
.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The column switch may be defective
.

If none of headlights (low-beam and high-beam) illu-
minates, the passing switch input circuit or
ETACS-ECU may have a problem.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
DIAGNOSIS STEP 2. Check that the headlights operate.

Check that the low-beam and high-beam headlights
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the illuminate normally.
ETACS-ECU diagnostic trouble code. Q: Is the check result normal?
CAUTION YES : Go to Step 3.
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), NO : Refer to Inspection Procedure 1 "None of
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" headlights (low-beam) illuminates."
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- P.54A-75 and Inspection Procedure 2
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). "None of headlights (high-beam)
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to illuminates." P.54A-76.
connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65."
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. STEP 3. Retest the system.
(3) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is When the passing switch is turned on, check if the
stored. headlights illuminate normally.
position. Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
Q: Is the DTC stored? malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU. Refer to use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-218. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
NO : Go to Step 2. Malfunction P.00-13).
Inspection Procedure A-4: One of the headlights does not illuminate.
.

When one of the headlights does not illuminate, the  The headlight bulbs may be defective
wiring harness, connector(s), or the bulb may have a  The wiring harness or connectors may have
problem, or the fuse may be burned out. loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Bulb check

Check the bulb(s) of headlight that does not illuminate.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the bulb(s) of the light that does not
illuminate.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at the headlight (LH)

connector, headlight (RH) connector
harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the connector of light
which does not illuminate and the ground.
 Measure the resistance between the headlight (LH) con-
nector (ground terminal) and the ground.
 Measure the resistance between the headlight (RH)
connector (ground terminal) and the ground.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line between

headlight (LH) connector or headlight (RH) connector and
ground.
to GROUP 00  How to Use

in power supply line between headlight (LH) connector or
headlight (RH) connector and headlight relay (LO)
connector.
YES : Go to Step 5.

Check that the headlights illuminate normally.
NO : Replace the headlight socket.
Inspection Procedure A-5: The high-beam indicator light does not illuminate.
CAUTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT)

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the If the high-beam indicator does not illuminate nor-
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the mally, the harness in the CAN bus lines, connec-
communication circuit are normal. tor(s), ETACS-ECU, or combination meter may have
.
a problem.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the

 The ETACS-ECU may be defective ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
 The combination meter may be defective (1) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
 The wiring harness or connectors may have (2) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- stored.
nals pushed back in the connector (3) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
position.
DIAGNOSIS Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU. Refer to
ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-218.
STEP 1. Check the headlight.
NO : Go to Step 4.
Check that the headlights illuminate and go out nor-
mally when the lighting switch is operated.
STEP 4. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special
Function"
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Repair the headlights. Refer to P.54A-74. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), select "Test" from the
special function of the combination meter. Execute
the following item to check the indicator.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the  Item 6: Indicator (AUTO)
CAN bus line
CAUTION YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), NO : Replace the combination meter.
position.
YES : Go to Step 3.
Inspection Procedure A-6: The headlight automatic-shutdown function does not work normally.
.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the If the headlight automatic shutdown function does
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the not work normally, the above described input circuits
communication circuit are normal. or ETACS-ECU may have a problem. Also, it may be
.
OPERATION possible that the headlight automatic shutdown func-

tion is set to "Disable" through configuration function.
The ETACS-ECU operates this function in accor-
dance with the input signals from column switch .
(lighting switch), ignition switch (IG1), and front door TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
switch (LH).  The front door switch (LH) may be defective
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
DIAGNOSIS STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data

list
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Check the Use the ETACS-ECU service data to check the sig-
configuration function nals related to the operation of headlight automatic
Use the ETACS-ECU configuration function to check shutdown function.
that the "Headlight auto cut customize" is set to  Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
"Enable (C-spec.)" position.
 Open the driver’s door.
CAUTION
 Column switch (lighting switch): HEAD
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Item Item name Normal condition
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- No.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). 19 Driver's door switch ON
connect the scan tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65." 30 Ignition switch(IG1) OFF
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. 60 Headlight output ON
(3) Use the ETACS-ECU configuration function to
check that the "Headlight auto cut customize" is OK: Normal conditions are displayed for all
set to "Enable (C-spec.)" the items
position. Q: Are the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 4.
Q: Is the check result normal? NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to
YES : Go to Step 2. ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-239.
NO : Use the ETACS-ECU configuration function
to set the "Headlight auto cut customize" to
"Enable (C-spec.)" (Refer to P.54A-97). STEP 4. Retest the system.
Check that the headlight automatic-shutdown func-
tion works normally.
diagnostic trouble code. Q: Is the check result normal?
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
(2) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
stored. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
(3) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
position. Malfunction P.00-13).
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-218).
NO : Go to Step 3.
Inspection Procedure A-7: The position light does not illuminate.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the If all the position lights do not illuminate normally, the
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the taillight switch input circuit or the ETACS-ECU may
communication circuit are normal. have a problem.
.
 The column switch may be defective
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
DIAGNOSIS

trouble code.
CAUTION
NO : Go to Step 2.

Check the input signal from the taillight switch.
 Column switch (lighting switch): TAIL
No.
59 Taillight output ON
OK: Normal conditions is displayed

YES : Go to Step 3.

Check that all the position lights illuminate normally.
Inspection Procedure A-8: Either of the position lights does not illuminate.
CAUTION COMMENTS ON TROUBLE SYMPTOM

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the If any of the position lights does not illuminate, the
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the wiring harness, connector(s), or the bulb may have a
communication circuit are normal. problem, or the fuse may be burned out.
.
 The position light bulb may be defective
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
 The headlight assembly may be defective  The wiring harness or connectors may have
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Bulb check

Check the bulb(s) of the position light that does not illuminate.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the bulb(s) of the light that does not
illuminate.
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at position light (LH)

connector, position light (RH) connector
harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the connector of light
which does not illuminate and the ground.
 Measure the resistance between the position light (LH)
 Measure the resistance between the position light (RH)
YES : Go to Step 4.
YES : Go to Step 3.

position light (LH) connector or position light (RH)
connector and ground.

in power supply line between position light (LH) connector
or position light (RH) connector and junction block
connector.
YES : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

Check that the position lights illuminate normally.
NO : Replace the position light which does not illuminate.
Inspection Procedure A-9: When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the lighting
switch at the OFF or TAIL position, the headlights will illuminate briefly.
.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The dome light fuse in the junction block may be
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the defective
communication circuit are normal.  The column switch may be defective
.

If the headlights illuminate briefly when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with the lighting
switch at the OFF or TAIL position, dome light fuse in
the junction block is blown (pulled off).
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check dome light fuse.

Check dome light fuse in the junction block is blown or pulled
off.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : The trouble can be an intermittent malfunction (Refer
Troubleshooting/inspection Service Points 
Inspection service points for a blown fuse P.00-15).
STEP 2. Check that the headlights operate.

Check that the low-beam and high-beam headlights work nor-
mally.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Follow Inspection Procedure A-1: None of the
low-beam headlights illuminate (Refer to P.54A-75)
and Inspection Procedure A-2: None of the
high-beam headlights illuminate (Refer to P.54A-76).
Then go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the ETACS

CAUTION
(2) Check if the ETACS-ECU stores a DTC.
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU.(Refer to P.54A-218) After
the repair, go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Voltage measurement at column switch connector.

harness-side connector.
(2) Measure the voltage between the column switch connector
(power supply terminal) and the ground.
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 5.

in power supply line between column switch connector
and junction block connector.
YES : Go to Step 6.

Check whether the headlights illuminate briefly when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON position with the lighting switch
in the OFF or TAIL position.
NO : Replace the column switch (lighting switch).
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
Inspection Procedure A-10: Daytime running light function does not work normally.
.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The input signal may be defective
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  The headlight relay (LO) may be defective

.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) The wiring harness or connectors may have

If the daytime running light function does not work,
connector(s), wiring harness in the CAN bus lines,
the engine control module, the combination meter,
the ETACS-ECU or the input signal circuit may be
defective.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Verify the headlight (low-beam) operation.

Check to see that the headlight (low-beam) lights up properly
when operating the dimmer switch while the headlight switch is
ON.
Q: Do the headlights (low-beam) illuminate normally?
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Refer to Inspection Procedure A-1 "None of the
low-beam headlights illuminate P.54A-75."

line.
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 3.
Diagnosis P.54C-12).
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the ETACS-ECU

Check whether ETACS-ECU DTCs are stored.
(2) Check for ETACS-ECU DTCs.
NO : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 4. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the MFI system

Check whether engine control module DTCs are stored or not.
(2) Check for engine control module DTCs.
YES : Diagnose the MFI system. Refer to GROUP 13A,
Diagnosis P.13A-47.
NO : Go to Step 5.
STEP 5. Check the parking brake switch.

Check the input signals from the parking brake switch.
(2) Check that the brake warning light on the combination
meter goes off when the parking brake lever is released.
Q: Does the brake warning light go off?
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Diagnose the Parking Brakes. Refer to GROUP 36,
Trouble Symptom Chart P.36-2. Verify that the
daytime running light function does not work normally.
STEP 6. Temporarily replace the headlight relay (LO), and

retest the system.
After temporarily replacing the headlight relay (LOW), with the
ignition switch being in the ON position (engine is running),
release the parking brake (parking brake switch: OFF) and turn
the lighting switch to the OFF or TAIL position, and then check
if the headlights (low-beam) illuminate with a reduced beam
state.
Q: Does the headlights (low-beam) do not illuminate in
good condition?
YES : Replace the headlight relay (LO).
Inspection Procedure B-1: None of the turn-signal lights illuminate.

.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The column switch may be defective
.

If none of the turn-signal lights does not illuminate,
the ignition switch (IG1), the turn-signal light switch
input circuit or the ETACS-ECU may be defective.
Using a customization function, the turn-signal lights
can be operated even when the ignition switch is in
the ACC position.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

list
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the Using the ETACS-ECU service data, check the sig-
diagnostic trouble code nals related to the illumination of turn-signal light.
 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Item Item name Normal condition
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" No.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- 30 Ignition switch(IG1) ON
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to OK: Normal condition is displayed.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Q: Is the check result normal?
(3) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is YES : Go to Step 3.
stored. NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-239.
position.
Q: Is the DTC stored? STEP 3. Retest the system
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU. Refer to Check that the turn-signal lights illuminate.
ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-218. Q: Is the check result normal?
NO : Go to Step 2. YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
Inspection Procedure B-2: The comfort flasher does not work normally.
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Check the
communication circuit are normal. configuration function.
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) CAUTION

If the comfort flasher function does not work nor- To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
mally, the turn-signal light switch input circuit(s) and always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
ETACS-ECU may have a problem. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
.

 The column switch may be defective
(3) Use the ETACS-ECU configuration function to
check that the "Comfort flasher" is set to
"Enable".
position.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Use the ETACS-ECU customize function to
set the "Comfort flasher" to "Enable" (Refer
to P.54A-97).
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the STEP 3. Check that the turn-signal light operate.
ETACS-ECU diagnostic trouble code. Check that the turn-signal light work normally when
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
(2) Check whether the ETACS-ECU DTC is stored. Q: Is the check result normal?
(3) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) YES : Go to Step 4.
position. NO : Refer to inspection procedure B-1 "None of
Q: Is the DTC stored? the turn-signal lights illuminate P.54A-88."
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-218). STEP 4. Replace the ECU.
NO : Go to Step 3.
(1) Replace the ETACS-ECU.
(2) Check that the comfort flasher works normally.
NO : Replace the column switch.
Inspection Procedure B-3: The turn-signal indicator lights do not illuminate.
CAUTION STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the CAN bus line
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the CAUTION
communication circuit are normal. To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
If the turn-signal light indicator does not illuminate (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
normally, the harness in the CAN bus lines, connec- ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
tor(s), ETACS-ECU, or combination meter may have (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
a problem. connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65."
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
 Malfunction of the ETACS-ECU position.
 Malfunction of combination meter
YES : Go to Step 3.
DIAGNOSIS NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP
STEP 1. Check turn-signal light
Check that the turn-signal light flashes normally STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the
when the turn-signal switch is operated. diagnostic trouble code.
Q: Is the check result normal? Check if diagnostic trouble code is stored in the
YES : Go to Step 2. ETACS-ECU.
NO : Refer to Inspection Procedure B-1 "None of (1) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
the turn-signal lights illuminate" P.54A-88. (2) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is
stored.
position.
NO : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

Function"
Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), select "Test" from the
Inspection Procedure B-4: One of the turn-signal lights does not illuminate.
CAUTION
Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the power sup-
ply circuit, the ground circuit and the communication cir-
cuit are normal.
.

If one of the turn-signal lights does not illuminate, the wiring
harness connector(s) or the bulb may be defective.
.
 The turn-signal light bulb may be defective
 The side turn-signal light assembly may be defective
<Fender panel type>
 The side turn-signal light assembly may be defective <Door
mirror type>
the connector
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Confirm which turn-signal light is defective.

Q: Which turn-signal light fails to illuminate correctly?
YES (All of the turn-signal lights illuminate normally) :
The procedure is complete.
NO (Only the front or rear turn-signal lights does not
illuminate normally) : Refer to ETACS diagnostic trouble
code chart.
NO (Only the side turn-signal lights does not illuminate
normally) : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at the side turn-signal

light connector.
harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the defective light
connector terminal and the ground.
light (LH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
light (RH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
bly (LH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
<Door mirror type>.
bly (RH) connector (ground terminal) and the ground
<Door mirror type>.
OK: Continuity exists (2  or less)
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line between side

turn-signal light connector <Fender mirror type>, door
mirror assembly <Door mirror type> and ground.
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in TURN LH or TURN RH line

between side turn-signal light connector <Fender mirror
type>, door mirror assembly connector <Door mirror type>
and ETACS-ECU connector.
YES : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT

Check that the side turn-signal light flashes normally when the
turn-signal switch is operated.
NO : Replace the side turn-signal light assembly <Fender
panel type>, side turn-signal light assembly (Refer to
GROUP 51  Door Mirror P.51-68) <Door mirror
type>.
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
HEADLIGHT AIMING
M1540100500702
PRE-AIMING INSTRUCTIONS (LOW-BEAM)

.
1. Inspect for rusted or faulty headlight assemblies.

2. These conditions must be corrected before a satisfactory
adjustment can be made.
3. Inspect tire inflation, and adjust if necessary.
4. If the fuel tank is not full, place a weight in the luggage
compartment of the vehicle to simulate weight of a full tank
[3 kg (6.6 pounds) per gallon].
5. There should be no other load in the vehicle other than
driver or substituted weight of approximately 68 kg (150
pounds) placed in driver's position.
6. Thoroughly clean headlight lenses.
7. Place the vehicle on a level floor, perpendicular to a flat
screen 7.62 m (25.0 ft) away from the bulb center-marks on
the headlight lens.
8. Rock vehicle sideways to allow vehicle to assume its normal
position.
9. Bounce the front suspension through three (3) oscillations
by applying the body weight to hood or bumper.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
(1) 10.Set the distance between the screen and the bulb center
Headlight center marks of the headlight as shown in the illustration.
Screen
(2) (3) 11.Four lines of adhesive tape (or equivalent markings) are
Vehicle center line required on screen or wall:
(3)
(1) Position a vertical tape or mark so that it is aligned with
the vehicle center line.
(2) Measure the distance from the center-marks on the
7.62 m (25.0 ft)
headlight lens to the floor [ reference value: 832.8 mm
(32.79 inches)]. Transfer the measurement to the screen.
AC505906AD Horizontal tape or mark on the screen is for reference of
vertical adjustment.
(3) Measure the distance from the center line of the vehicle
to the center of each headlight. Transfer the
measurement to the screen. Vertical tape or mark on the
screen with reference to the center line of each headlight
bulb.
Bulb center position
ACC06402AC
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT (LOW-BEAM)

1. The low-beam headlight will project on the screen upper
edge of the beam (cut-off).
Horizontal direction
2. Turn the adjusting screw to achieve the specified low-beam
cut-off location on the aiming screen.
Vertical direction
Phillips screwdriver
Horizontal direction
adjustment screw
Vertical direction
adjustment screw
ACC07535AB
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
Standard value:
(Vertical direction) Horizontal line (H)  50.5 mm (
(V)
266.1 2.0 inches) ( 0.38 degrees angle)
(10.5) Cutoff
line
(Horizontal direction):  126.4 mm ( 5.0 inches) (
0.95 degrees angle) from the axis, which is 266.1
50.5 (2.0) mm (10.5 inches) (2 degrees angle) rightward from
(H)
50.5 (2.0) the vertical line (V)
CAUTION
Do not cover a headlight for more than three minutes to
mm (in) 126.4 (5.0) 126.4 (5.0) AC710559 AD prevent the plastic headlight lens deformation.
NOTE: High-beam pattern should be correct when the
low-beams are adjusted properly.
LUMINOUS INTENSITY MEASUREMENT

M1540100600323
1. Set the headlights to high-beam.
2. Using a photometer, and following its manufacturer's
instruction manual, measure the headlight center intensity
and check to be sure that the limit value is satisfied.
Limit: 40,000 cd or more {When a screen is set 18.3m
(60 feet) ahead of the vehicle}
NOTE: When measuring the intensity, maintain an engine
speed of 2,000 r/min, with the battery fully charged.
There may be special local regulations pertaining to headlight
intensity. Be sure to make any adjustments necessary to satisfy
such regulations.
If an illuminometer is used to make the measurements, convert
its values to photometer values by using the following formula.
I =E  r2
 I = intensity (cd)
 E = illumination (lux)
 r = distance (m) from headlights to illuminometer
BULB REPLACEMENT
M1542001301800
HEADLIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
Don't touch the bulb surface with bare hands or dirty
gloves. If the bulb surface (glass part) gets dirty, clean it
with alcohol or thinner immediately and dry well, and then
install it.
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Disconnect the connector.
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
3. Remove bulb mounting spring to pull out bulb.

4. After bulb is replaced, properly reconnect connector.
Spring
Headlight bulb
ACC06639 AB
POSITION LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT

1. Turn the position light socket and remove the position light
bulb.
Position light
socket
ACC06639AC
FRONT TURN-SIGNAL LIGHT BULB

REPLACEMENT
1. Turn the front turn-signal light socket and remove the front
turn-signal light bulb.
Front turn-signal light socket
ACC06639AD
FRONT SIDE-MARKER LIGHT BULB

REPLACEMENT
1. Turn the front side-marker light socket and remove the front
side-marker light bulb.
Front side-marker light socket
ACC06639AE
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
HEADLIGHT AUTOMATIC-SHUTDOWN
FUNCTION CHECK
M1540100800275
Confirm that the headlights turn OFF in one second if the
driver's door is opened when the ignition switch is OFF and the
lighting switch is ON (TAIL or HEAD position). If there is a mal-
function, perform the troubleshooting (Refer to P.54A-74).
CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION
M1540103701281
Using the ETACS system of scan tool (M.U.T.-III), the
following functions can be programmed. The pro-
grammed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
Adjustment Adjustment item Adjusting content Adjusting content
item (scan tool (scan tool display)
display)
Turn power Adjustment of ACC or IG1 Operable with ACC or ON position
source turn-signal light IG1 Operable with ON position (initial
operation condition condition)
Comfort flasher With/without Disable No function
comfort flasher Enable With function (Initial condition)
function
Comfort flasher Switch operation 400ms 0.4 second (Initial condition)
switch time time to activate the 800ms 0.8 second
comfort flasher
function
Hazard answer Adjustment of the Lock:1, Unlock:2 LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: Flashes
back number of keyless twice (Initial condition)
hazard warning light Lock:1, Unlock:0 LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: No flash
answer back
flashes Lock:0, Unlock:2 LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash twice
Lock:2, Unlock:1 LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:2, Unlock:0 LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:1 LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:0, Unlock:0 No function
Headlight auto Adjustment of Disable No function
cut customize headlight automatic Enable (C-spec.) With function (Initial condition)
shutdown function
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
HEADLIGHT
HEADLIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

M1540101000874
Pre-removal Operation Post-installation Operation

Front bumper assembly removal (Refer to GROUP 51   Front bumper assembly installation (Refer to GROUP 51
Front Bumper Assembly P.51-3.)  Front Bumper Assembly P.51-3.)
 Check the beam direction of the headlight (Refer to Head-
light Aiming P.54A-93).
2.5 ± 0.3 N·m

22 ± 2 in-lb
6 5
1
4.9 ± 0.7 N·m 7
43 ± 6 in-lb 9
8
3
4
4.9 ± 0.7 N·m

43 ± 6 in-lb
ACC06849 AB

1. Headlight assembly 6. Front turn-signal light bulb
2. Grommet 7. Headlight bulb
3. Socket 8. Socket
4. Position light bulb 9. Front side-marker light bulb
5. Socket
TSB Revision
HEADLIGHT
INSPECTION
HEADLIGHT RELAY CHECK

M1540104000389
ACC01201
Headlight relay (LO)
Battery voltage Terminal Normal
number condition
At no energization 34 No
continuity
With current supply Continuity
[terminal 2 (+), terminal 1 exists (2
()] ohms or
Headlight relay (HI) less)
3
4
2 1
ACC04615AB
TSB Revision
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

SPECIAL TOOLS
M1541400100333

name
a a. MB992744  DTC, service data and actuator test
b. MB992745 check.
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision

name
a
b pushing V.C.I. DTC, service data and actuator test
f. MB991825
ENTER key. check.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1541402500166
tents P.00-6.
M1541401000511
Trouble symptom Inspection Reference page

Procedure No.
None of the taillights illuminate. 1 P.54A-102
One of taillights does not illuminate. 2 P.54A-103
The back-up light do not illuminate normally. 3 P.54A-104
The stoplight do not illuminate or go out normally. 4 P.54A-107
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: None of the taillights illuminate.

.

Before replacing the ECU, ensure that the power If none of taillights illuminates, the taillight switch
supply circuit, the ground circuit and the com- input circuit or ETACS-ECU may have a problem.
munication circuit are normal.
.
TSB Revision
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data

 The column switch may be defective list
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective Check the input signal from the taillight switch.
 Column switch (lighting switch): TAIL
DIAGNOSIS
condition
59 Taillight output ON
CAUTION OK: Normal condition is displayed.
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. STEP 3. Retest the system
(3) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is Check that the taillight illuminates normally.
stored. Q: Is the check result normal?
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
position. malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
Q: Is the DTC stored? use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
YES : Diagnose the ETACS-ECU. Refer to Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-218. Malfunction P.00-13).
NO : Go to Step 2. NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
Inspection Procedure 2: One of taillights does not illuminate.
.

If one of the taillights does not Illuminate, the wiring  The rear combination light unit may be defective
harness, connector(s), or rear combination light unit  The wiring harness or connectors may have
may have a problem, or the fuse may be burned out. loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check the bulbs of the taillights.

Check the bulb of the light which does not illuminate.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the bulb of the light which does not
illuminate.
TSB Revision

light (taillight: LH) connector or rear combination light
(taillight: RH) connector.
harness side.
(2) Check the resistance between the light connector and
ground.
 Measure the resistance between the rear combination
light (taillight: LH) connector (ground terminal) and the
ground.
light (taillight: RH) connector (ground terminal) and the
ground.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line between the

rear combination light (taillight: LH) connector or rear
combination light (taillight: RH) connector (ground
terminal) and ground.
YES : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in TAIL LP lines between the

rear combination light (taillight: LH) connector or rear
combination light (taillight: RH) connector and
ETACS-ECU connector.
YES : Go to Step 5.

Check that the taillights illuminate normally.
NO : Replace the taillight socket.
Inspection Procedure 3: The back-up light do not illuminate normally.
CAUTION
.
TSB Revision

If both of the back-up light do not illuminate normally,  The transmission range switch <CVT> or buck-up
the input signal circuit(s) or the transmission range light switch <M/T> may be defective
switch <CVT>, back-up light switch <M/T>, may be  The bulbs may be defective
defective.  The rear combination light assembly may be
defective
.

DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check the operation of the position lights and the

headlights.
Check that the position lights and the headlights illuminate nor-
mally.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Check the position lights and the headlights (Refer to
trouble symptom chart P.54A-74).
STEP 2. Check the transmission range switch <CVT> or

back-up light switch <M/T>.
Check the continuity of the transmission range switch <CVT>
or the back-up light switch <M/T>.(GROUP 23A  On-vehicle
Service, Transmission Range Switch Continuity Check
P.23A-123 <CVT>, GROUP 22B  Transmission, Transmission
Inspection P.22B-18)
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Replace the transmission range switch <CVT> or
back-up light switch <M/T>.
STEP 3. Voltage measurement at the transmission range

switch connector <CVT> or back-up light switch connector
<M/T>.
(1) Remove the transmission range switch connector <CVT> or
back-up light switch connector <M/T>, and measure at the
junction block side.
(2) Move the ignition switch to the ON position.
(3) Measure the voltage between the transmission range
switch connector <CVT> or back-up light switch connector
<M/T> (power supply terminals) and ground.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in power supply line

between the transmission range switch connector <CVT>
or back-up light switch connector <M/T> and the ignition
switch (IG1).
YES : Go to Step 5.
STEP 5. Check the bulb of the back-up light

Check the bulb of the defective light.
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Replace the bulb of the defective light.

light (back-up light) connector
harness side.
(2) Check the resistance between the light connector and
ground.
light (back-up light) connector (ground terminal) and the
ground.
YES : Go to Step 8.
NO : Go to Step 7.
STEP 7. Check of open circuit in ground line between rear

combination light (back-up light) connector and ground.
YES : Go to Step 8.
STEP 8. Check of open circuit in output line between the

rear combination light (back-up light) connector and
back-up light switch connector.
YES : Go to Step 9.

Check that the back-up light illuminate normally.
NO : Replace the rear combination light assembly.
TSB Revision
Inspection Procedure 4: The stoplight do not illuminate or go out normally.

.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) STEP 2. Voltage measurement at the joint

If the stoplights do not illuminate or go out normally, connector
the stoplight switch input circuit, ground circuit sys- (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
tem, stoplight switch may be defective. wiring harness side.
(2) Stoplight switch: ON
(3) Measure the voltage between the joint connector
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (power supply terminal) and the ground.

 The stoplight switch may be defective
 The stoplight switch input circuit may be defective OK: The voltage should measure approxi-
 The stoplights may be defective mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage).
 The wiring harness or connectors may have Q: Is the check result normal?
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- YES : Go to Step 4.
nals pushed back in the connector NO : Go to Step 3.
DIAGNOSIS STEP 3. Check of short to power supply, and

Required Special Tools: open circuit in power supply line between the
 MB992006: Extra fine probe joint connector and the fusible link.
 MB991223: Harness set Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 5.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
list
CAUTION STEP 4. Resistance measurement at the liftgate
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), spoiler connector <high-mounted stoplight>, rear
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" combination light (stop: LH) connector, rear
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- combination light (stop: RH) connector
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to wiring harness side.
connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65." (2) Measure the resistance between the connector of
(2) Check the input signals from the stoplight switch. light which does not illuminate and the ground.
 Brake pedal: depressed  Measure the resistance between the inte-
grated in liftgate spoiler connector (ground
Item Item name Normal condition terminal) and the ground. <high-mounted
No. stoplight>
108 Stoplight switch OFF to ON (only  Measure the resistance between the rear
when switch is combination light (stop: LH) connector
operated) (ground terminal) and the ground.
 Measure the resistance between the rear
OK: Normal condition is displayed. combination light (stop: RH) connector
(ground terminal) and the ground.
YES : Go to Step 2. OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or
NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to less
ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-239. Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
STEP 5. Check the following wiring harness STEP 6. Check the following wiring harness
Check the wiring harness for ground circuit between Check the wiring harness for open circuit between
the following connectors: the following connectors:
 Check of open circuit in ground line between inte-  Check of open circuit in output line between inte-
grated in liftgate spoiler connector and ground. grated in liftgate spoiler connector and joint con-
<high-mounted stoplight> nector. <high-mounted stoplight>
 Check of open circuit in ground line between rear  Check of open circuit in output line between rear
combination light (stop: LH) connector and combination light (stop: LH) connector and joint
ground. connector.
 Check of open circuit in ground line between rear  Check of open circuit in output line between rear
combination light (stop: RH) connector and combination light (stop: RH) connector and joint
ground. connector.
Q: Is the check result normal? Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 6. YES : Go to Step 7.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. NO : Replace the connector(s) or wiring harness.

Check that the stoplights illuminates normally.
NO : Replace the stoplights.
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
REPLACE THE BULB

M1541402100113
REAR TURN-SIGNAL LIGHT BULB

REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the rear combination light assembly.
2. Turn the rear turn-signal light socket to remove.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn-signal light socket
ACB03486AB
STOPLIGHT/TAILLIGHT/REAR SIDE-MARKER
LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
TSB Revision
2. Turn the stoplight/taillight/rear side-marker light socket to

remove.
Stoplight/taillight/
rear side-marker light socket
ACB03487AB
BACK-UP LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT

2. Turn the back-up light socket to remove.
Back-up light socket ACB03488AB
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL

AND INSTALLATION
M1541402200541
4
6
3 1
5
1.2 ± 0.7 N·m
2 11 ± 6 in-lb
ACB03111AB
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
Removal steps Removal steps

1. Rear combination light 5. Back-up light bulb
assembly 6. Socket
2. Rear combination light unit 7. Grommet
3. Rear turn-signal light bulb 8. Clip
4. Stoplight/taillight/rear 9. Clip
side-marker light bulb
FRONT FOG LIGHT

M1540400900392
Item Standard value Limit

Front fog light aiming (cutoff line The horizontal line 153.0 mm (6.02 
direction) [at 7.62 m (25.0 ft)] inches) (1.15 degrees angle) below
the horizontal line (H)
Front fog light aiming (vertical  Area from 53.2 mm (2.09 inches)
direction) [at 7.62 m (25.0 ft)] (0.4 degrees angle) above the
cutoff line to 99.8 mm (3.93 inches)
(0.75 degrees angle) below the
cutoff line
Front fog light aiming (horizontal  Vertical line (V)  599.7 mm ( 23.6
direction) [at 7.62 m (25.0 ft)] inches) ( 4.5 degrees angle).
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1540401800354

name
b. MB992745 check.
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT

name
a
f. MB991825
ENTER key. check.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1540401700120
tents P.00-6.
M1540401000411

Procedure No.
The front fog lights do not illuminate normally. 1 P.54A-113
One of the front fog lights does not illuminate normally. 2 P.54A-115
The front fog light indicator does not illuminate normally. 3 P.54A-116
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: The front fog lights do not illuminate normally.
CAUTION CIRCUIT OPERATION

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the When none of the front fog lights illuminates, the
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the mentioned input signal circuit(s) or ETACS-ECU may
communication circuit are normal. be defective.
.
 Headlight switch
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
 Fog light switch STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the
 Option coding information other system diagnostic trouble code
.
Check if DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) (1) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
When the fog lights do not illuminate normally, the (2) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is
mentioned input signal circuit(s) or ETACS-ECU may stored.
be defective. (3) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
.
position.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Q: Is the DTC stored?
 The column switch may be defective YES : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-218).
 The wiring harness or connectors may have NO : Go to Step 4.
nals pushed back in the connector STEP 4. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
list.
DIAGNOSIS Use the ETACS-ECU data list to check the signals
Required Special Tools: related to the fog light function.
 MB992006: Extra fine probe  Column switch (lighting switch): HEAD
 MB991223: Harness set  Turn the fog light switch to ON.
STEP 1. ETACS-ECU coding data check condition
CAUTION 70 Front fog light ON
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" OK: Normal condition is displayed.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Q: Is the check result normal?
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). YES : Go to Step 5.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to
connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65." ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-239.
(3) Read out the option coding information in the
STEP 5. Check the front fog light relay
ETACS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 00, Precautions
Refer to P.54A-120.
before service, Coding Table P.00-33).
(4) Check that the "Front fog light" is set to "YES." Q: Is the check result normal?
(5) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) YES : Go to Step 6.
position. NO : Replace the front fog light relay.
Q: Is the ETACS-ECU coding data normal?

YES : Go to Step 2. STEP 6. Voltage measurement at the front fog
NO : Operate scan tool (M.U.T.-III) to set the light relay connector
option coding "Front fog light" to "Yes," and (1) Remove the front fog light relay, and measure at
check the trouble symptom. the relay box side.
(2) Measure the voltage between the front fog light
relay connector (power supply terminal) and the
STEP 2. Check the operation of the headlights.
ground.
Check that the headlights illuminate normally.
OK: The voltage should measure approxi-
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Check the headlights (Refer to trouble Q: Is the check result normal?
symptom chart P.54A-74). YES : Go to Step 8.
NO : Go to Step 7.
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
STEP 7. Check of short to power supply, and STEP 10. Check of open circuit in ground lines
open circuit in power supply lines between front between the front fog light (LH) or front fog light
fog light relay connector and the fusible link. (RH) connector and ground.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
STEP 8. Check of short to power supply, and STEP 11. Retest the system
open circuit in FOGY line between front fog light Check that the front fog lights illuminate normally.
relay connector and the ETACS-ECU connector. Q: Is the check result normal?
Q: Is the check result normal? YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
YES : Go to Step 9. malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
STEP 9. Check of short to power supply, and Malfunction P.00-13).
open circuit in output lines between front fog
light relay connector and the front fog light (LH)
or front fog light (RH) connector.
Inspection Procedure 2: One of the front fog lights does not illuminate normally.
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) STEP 2. Resistance measurement at the front fog

If one of the fog lights do not illuminate, the wiring light (LH) connector or front fog light (RH)
harness connector(s), the bulb or the fuse may be connector
defective or burned out. (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
wiring harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the connector of
.
light which does not illuminate and the ground.
 The bulbs may be defective  Measure the resistance between the front fog
 The wiring harness or connectors may have light (LH) connector (ground terminal) and the
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- ground.
nals pushed back in the connector  Measure the resistance between the front fog
light (RH) connector (ground terminal) and the
DIAGNOSIS ground.
Required Special Tools: OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or
 MB992006: Extra fine probe less
 MB991223: Harness set Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 4.
STEP 1. Bulb check NO : Go to Step 3.
Check the bulb(s) of the light that does not illuminate.
Q: Is the check result normal? STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground lines
YES : Go to Step 2. between the front fog light (LH) connector or
NO : Replace the bulb(s) of the light that does not front fog light (RH) connector and ground.
illuminate. Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, and STEP 5. Retest the system
open circuit in output lines between front fog Check that the front fog lights illuminate normally.
light relay connector and the front fog light (LH) Q: Is the check result normal?
or front fog light (RH) connector. YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
Q: Is the check result normal? malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
YES : Go to Step 5. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
NO : Go to Step 1.
Inspection Procedure 3: The front fog light indicator does not illuminate normally.
CAUTION STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the CAN bus line.
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the CAUTION
communication circuit are normal. To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
If the front fog light indicator does not illuminate nor- (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
mally, connector(s), wiring harness in the CAN bus ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
lines, the ETACS-ECU or the combination meter may (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
be defective. connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65."
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective position.
YES : Go to Step 3.
DIAGNOSIS NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP
STEP 1. Check the front fog lights
When the front fog light switch is operated, check STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the
that the front fog lights illuminate/go off normally. ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
Q: Is the check result normal? (1) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
YES : Go to Step 2. (2) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is
NO : First, repair the front fog lights (Refer to stored.
trouble symptom chart P.54A-113). (3) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
position.
NO : Go to Step 4.

Function"
Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), select "Test" from the
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING

M1540400300851
PRE-AIMING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Inspect for rusted or faulty front fog light assemblies.
2. These conditions must be corrected before a satisfactory
adjustment can be made.
3. Inspect tire inflation, and adjust if necessary.
4. If the fuel tank is not full, place a weight in the trunk of the
vehicle to simulate weight of a full tank [3 kg (6.5 pounds)
per gallon].
5. There should be no other load in the vehicle other than
driver or substituted weight of approximately 68 kg (150
pounds) placed in driver's position.
6. Thoroughly clean the front fog light lenses.
7. Place the vehicle on a level floor, perpendicular to a flat
screen 7.62 meters (25.0 ft) away from the bulb
center-marks on the front fog light lens.
8. Rock the vehicle sideways to allow the vehicle to assume its
normal position.
9. Bounce the front suspension through three (3) oscillations
by applying the body weight to the hood or bumper.
10.Measure the center of the front fog lights as shown in the
illustration.
Light center
Service hole
ACB03515AC
11.Four lines of adhesive tape (or equivalent markings) are

(1)
Screen Front fog light center required on screen or wall:
(3) (1) Position a vertical tape or mark so that it is aligned with
(2)
Vehicle center line
the vehicle center line.
(2) Measure the distance from the center of the front fog light
(3) lens to the floor. Transfer the measurement to the screen.
Horizontal tape or mark on the screen is for reference of
7.62 m (25.0 ft) vertical adjustment.
(3) Measure the distance from the center line of the vehicle
AC307983AD to the center of each front fog light. Transfer the
measurement to the screen. Vertical tape or mark on the
screen is for reference to the center line of each front fog
light.
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
FRONT FOG LIGHT ADJUSTMENT

(V) 1. Check if the beam shining onto the screen is at the standard
Cutoff line value.
(H)
Standard value:
153.0
(6.02) (Cutoff line direction): The horizontal line 153.0 mm
53.2 (2.09)
(6.02 inches) (1.15 degrees angle) below the hori-
Hot zone 99.8 (3.93) zontal line (H)
Limit:
(Vertical direction): Area from 53.2 mm (2.09 inches)
599.7 (23.6) 599.7 (23.6) (0.4 degrees angle) above the cutoff line to 99.8
mm (in) AC407086 AC mm (3.93 inches) (0.75 degrees angle) below the
cutoff line
(Horizontal direction): Vertical line (V)  599.7 mm (
23.6 inches) ( 4.5 degrees angle)
2. If it is not within the standard value range, adjust by turning
the adjusting screw.
Fog light unit NOTE: The horizontal direction is non-adjustable. If deviation of
the light beam axis exceeds the standard value, check that the
mounting location or some other points are not faulty.
Phillips
screwdriver
Adjusting
screw
ACB03085AC
REPLACE THE BULB

M1540400400825
CAUTION
Don't touch the bulb surface with bare hands or dirty
gloves. If the bulb surface (glass part) gets dirty, clean it
with alcohol or thinner immediately and dry well, and then
install it.
Note 1. Remove the clips of the front wheelhouse splash shield
: Clip position shown in the figure, and turn up the front wheelhouse splash
shield.
Front wheelhouse
splash shield
ACB05633AB
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
2. Disconnect the connector and withdraw the bulb.

3. Replace the bulb, and connect securely the connector.
Front fog light bulb
AC800370AL

M1540402600609
Post-installation operation
Check the beam direction of the front fog light (Refer to Front
Fog Light Aiming P.54A-117).
2.5 ± 0.3 N·m

5 22 ± 2 in-lb
2.5 ± 0.3 N·m
22 ± 2 in-lb
3
4
2
1
ACB03095AC

1. Front bumper assembly (Refer to 3. Bulb
GROUP 51  Front Bumper 4. Front fog light unit
Assembly P.51-3.) 5. Front fog light bracket
2. Front fog light assembly
TSB Revision
FRONT FOG LIGHT
INSPECTION
FRONT FOG LIGHT RELAY CHECK

M1540402800238
ACC01201
number condition
continuity
()] ohms or
less)
Front fog light relay
4
3
2 1
ACC04615AC
TSB Revision
SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LIGHT

M1541800200703
<DOOR MIRROR TYPE>

For the side turn-signal light removal and installation
procedures, refer to GROUP 51  Door Mirror
P.51-68.
<FENDER PANEL TYPE>
ACB03530 AB
Removal Step
<<A>> >>A<< 1. Side turn-signal light assembly

.
<<A>> SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL
Push the side turn-signal light toward the vehicle rear to bend
the hook, and then remove by disengaging the tab from the
Side turn-signal light fender panel.
Push
Forward of vehicle
AC904528AC
TSB Revision
INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.
>>A<< SIDE TURN-SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY

INSTALLATION
Engage the hook to the fender panel to install the side turn-sig-
nal light.
Hook
Claw
Fender
panel
Forward of vehicle AC506857AB
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT
DOME LIGHT
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1541301600334

name
b. MB992745 check.
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT

name
a
f. MB991825
ENTER key. check.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1541301500166
tents P.00-6.
M1541300200537

Procedure No.
The dome light does not illuminate normally. 1 P.54A-125
The luggage compartment light does not illuminate normally. 2 P.54A-127
The interior light automatic shutoff function does not work normally. 3 P.54A-128
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: The dome light does not illuminate normally.
CAUTION OPERATION
Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the The ETACS-ECU illuminates and extinguishes the
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the dome light in accordance with the input signals
communication circuit are normal. below.
.
 Ignition switch (IG1)
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT
 Key reminder switch STEP 2. Dome light bulb check

 Door switches Check that the dome light bulb is normal.
 Liftgate latch switch
 Front door lock actuator (driver’s side) Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 3.
.
NO : Replace the dome light bulb.

If this does not work normally, the above switch input
circuit(s), dome light, or ETACS-ECU may have a STEP 3. Check of open circuit in power supply
problem. lines between the dome light connector and the
fusible link.
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Q: Is the check result normal?

 The key reminder switch may be defective YES : Go to Step 5.
 The door switch may be defective
 The front door lock actuator (driver’s side) may
be defective STEP 4. Check of open circuit in ground line
 The dome light may be defective between the dome light connector and the
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective ground.
nals pushed back in the connector NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
DIAGNOSIS
Required Special Tools: Check that the dome light illuminates/extinguishes
 MB992006: Extra fine probe normally.
STEP 1. Retest the system. malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
Q: At which switch positions (DOOR or ON), the dome
light does not illuminate? Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
The light does not illuminate at both the DOOR and Malfunction P.00-13).
ON positions. : Go to Step 2. NO : Replace the dome light assembly.
The light does not illuminate at the ON position. :
Go to Step 4.
The light does not illuminate at the DOOR position.
: Go to Step 6.
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT
STEP 6. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data STEP 7. Check of open circuit in ROOM LP lines
list. between the dome light connector and the
CAUTION ETACS-ECU connector.
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Q: Is the check result normal?
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" YES : Go to Step 8.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to STEP 8. Retest the system
connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65." Check that the dome light illuminates/extinguishes
(2) Use the ETACS-ECU service data to check the normally.
signals related to the operation of dome light.
 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (OFF) Q: Is the check result normal?
position. YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
 Remove the ignition key from the ignition key malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
hole. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
 Open each door. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
Item No. Item name Normal NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
condition
19 Driver's door switch ON
20 Driver's door unlock ON
switch
28 Steering lock switch OFF  ON
30 IG SW (IG1) OFF
48 Passenger's door ON
switch
49 Rear door switch ON
OK: Normal conditions are displayed for

all the items.
YES : Go to Step 7.
ETACS, Diagnosis, Input Signal Chart
P.54A-239.
Inspection Procedure 2: The luggage compartment light does not illuminate normally.
CAUTION  Key reminder switch

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  Door switches
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  Liftgate latch switch
communication circuit are normal.  Front door lock actuator (driver’s side)
.
OPERATION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT)

The ETACS-ECU illuminates and extinguishes the If this does not work normally, the above switch input
luggage compartment light in accordance with the circuit(s), luggage compartment light assembly, or
input signals below. ETACS-ECU may have a problem.
.
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS STEP 2. Luggage compartment light bulb check

 The key reminder switch may be defective Check that the luggage compartment light bulb is
 The door switch may be defective normal.
 The front door lock actuator (driver’s side) may
be defective
YES : Go to Step 3.
 The luggage compartment light assembly may be
NO : Replace the luggage compartment light
defective
bulb.
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- STEP 3. Check of open circuit in power supply
nals pushed back in the connector lines between the luggage compartment light
connector and the fusible link.
DIAGNOSIS Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in ROOM lines
between the luggage compartment light
STEP 1. Dome light operation check
connector and the ETACS-ECU connector.
Check that the Dome light illuminates and extin-
guishes normally. Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 5.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Refer to Inspection Procedure "The dome
light does not illuminate normally STEP 5. Retest the system
P.54A-125." Check that the luggage compartment light illumi-
nates/extinguishes normally.
Inspection Procedure 3: The interior light automatic shutoff function does not work normally.
CAUTION  Door switches

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the If this function does not work normally, these input
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the signal circuit(s) or the ETACS-ECU may have a prob-
communication circuit are normal. lem. Also, "Interior light auto cut timer" may be set to
. "Disable" through customization.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) .
The ETACS-ECU operates the interior light auto- TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

matic shutoff function in accordance with the input  The door switch may be defective
signals below.  The ETACS-ECU may be defective
 Ignition switch (ACC)
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT

list
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Check the Use the ETACS-ECU service data to check the sig-
configuration function nals related to the interior light automatic shutoff
Use the ETACS-ECU customization function to function.
check whether "Interior light auto cut timer" is set to  Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (OFF) posi-
"30min". tion.
 Open each door.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Item No. Item name Normal
always turn the electric motor switch to the condition
"LOCK" (OFF) position before connecting or dis- 19 Driver's door switch ON
connecting scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to 29 Ignition switch (ACC) OFF
connect the scan tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65." 30 Ignition switch(IG1) OFF
(2) Turn the electric motor switch to the "ON"
position. 48 Passenger's door ON
(3) Use the ETACS-ECU configuration function to switch
check that the "Interior light auto cut timer" is set 49 Rear door switch ON
to "30min."
(4) Turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" OK: Normal conditions are displayed for all
(OFF) position. the items.
NO : Use the ETACS-ECU configuration function NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to
to set the "Interior light auto cut timer" to ETACS, Diagnosis, Input signal chart
"30min."(Refer to P.54A-129.) P.54A-239.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the STEP 4. Retest the system
diagnostic trouble code. Check that the interior light automatic shutoff func-
(1) Turn the electric motor switch to the "ON" tion works normally.
position.
(2) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is Q: Is the check result normal?
stored. YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
(3) Turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
(OFF) position. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
Q: Is the DTC stored? Malfunction P.00-13).
YES : Diagnose ETACS-ECU (Refer to NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
ETACS-ECU, Troubleshooting P.54A-218).
NO : Go to Step 3.
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
M1541301200596
is disconnected.
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT

display)
Interior light Adjustment of 0 sec. 0 second (no delay shutdown time)
delay time interior light delay 7.5 sec. 7.5 seconds <Initial condition (vehicles
shutdown time without central door locking system)>
15 sec. 15 seconds
30 sec. 30 seconds <Initial condition (vehicles with
central door locking system)>
60 sec. 60 seconds
120 sec. 120 seconds
Interior light Adjustment of Disable No function
auto cut timer interior light 30min With function (Initial condition)
automatic shutoff
function (only dome
light switch is door
position)
TSB Revision
DOME LIGHT
DOME LIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

M1541302700215
Section A - A
Headlining
Note
A : Clip positions ACB03219
A
5
A
A
3
1
2
ACC03217AB

1. Dome light assembly  Headlining (Refer to GROUP 52A -
2. Dome light lens Headlining P.52A-15)
3. Dome light bulb 5. Dome light bracket
4. Dome light
TSB Revision
HIGH-MOUNTED STOPLIGHT
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

M1541302600207
Quarter trim lower

3
2
1
ACC03233AB
Removal Step Removal Step (Continued)

<<A>> 1. Luggage compartment light 2. Luggage compartment light
assembly 3. Bulb

.
<<A>> LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Remove the luggage compartment light assembly by pressing
Forward of vehicle
the assembly toward the vehicle front.
Push
ACC04578AB
HIGH-MOUNTED STOPLIGHT
M1541700200546
Refer to GROUP 51  Liftgate Spoiler P.51-16.
TSB Revision
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

DIAGNOSIS
M1541900700073
tents P.00-6.
M1541900400072
Trouble symptoms Inspection Reference page

Procedure No.
The license plate lights do not illuminate. 1 P.54A-133
One of the license plate lights does not illuminate. 2 P.54A-134
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: The license plate lights do not illuminate.

. .

If the license plate lights do not illuminate normally,  The wiring harness or connectors may have
the harness or connector(s) may have a problem, or loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
the fuse may be blown. nals pushed back in the connector
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Operation check of rear combination light

(taillight, LH)
Check that the rear combination light (taillight, LH) illuminates
normally.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Diagnose the rear combination light. Inspection
Procedure 1:None of the taillights illuminate. (Refer to
P.00-14.)
TSB Revision
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at license plate light

connector
(1) Disconnect the connector and measure at wiring harness
side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the license plate light
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.

license plate light connector and ground.
YES : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Check of open circuit in power supply lines

between the license plate light connector and joint
connector.
Inspection Procedure 2: One of the license plate lights does not illuminate.
.

When one of the license lights does not illuminate,  The license plate light bulbs may be defective
wiring harness, connector(s) or the bulb may be  The license plate light assembly may be defec-
defective. tive
.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Bulb check

Check the bulb(s) of the license plate light that does not illumi-
nate.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the bulb(s) of the license plate light that does
not illuminate.
TSB Revision
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

Check that the license plate light illuminates normally.
YES) : The trouble can be an intermittent malfunction (Refer
NO : Replace the license plate light assembly.

M1541900200498
2.5 ± 0.3 N·m

22 ± 2 in-lb 5
4 2
1.2 ± 0.7 N·m

11 ± 6 in-lb
1
ACC06720AB

 Rear bumper face (Refer to 2. License plate light
GROUP 51  Rear Bumper assembly/License plate light
Assembly P.51-6.) bracket
1. Clip 3. License plate light assembly
4. Grommet
5. License plate light bracket
TSB Revision
HAZARD WARNING LIGHT SWITCH

SPECIAL TOOLS
M1541500100329

name
b. MB992745 check.
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision

name
a
f. MB991825
ENTER key. check.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1541501400141
tents P.00-6.
M1541500700365

Procedure No.
The hazard warning lights do not illuminate. 1 P.54A-138
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: The hazard warning lights do not illuminate.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the If the hazard warning lights do not illuminate, the
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the hazard warning light switch input circuit in center
communication circuit are normal. panel unit or the ETACS-ECU may have a problem.
.
 The hazard warning light switch may be defective
TSB Revision
 The wiring harness or connectors may have STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- list
nals pushed back in the connector Check the input signal from the hazard warning light
switch.
DIAGNOSIS  Operate the hazard warning light switch.
STEP 1. Check that the turn-signal lights operate. No.
Check that the turn-signal lights illuminate normally.
26 Hazard warning light OFF to ON (only
Q: Is the check result normal? switch when switch is
YES : Go to Step 2.
operated)
NO : Refer to inspection procedure B-1 "None of
the turn-signal lights illuminate P.54A-88."
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the YES : Go to Step 4.
diagnostic trouble code. NO : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU. Refer to
CAUTION ETACS, Diagnosis P.54A-239.
Check that the hazard warning lights illuminate.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to Q: Is the check result normal?
connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-65." YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
(3) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
stored. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) Malfunction P.00-13).
position. NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.

NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision

M1541501000347
1 2
ACB03206AB
Removal Steps
1. Instrument center panel (Refer to
GROUP 52A  Instrument Panel
P.52A-2.)
2. Hazard warning light switch
INSPECTION
CONTINUITY CHECK FOR HAZARD WARNING

LIGHT SWITCH
M1541501100377
Switch position Measured Normal

terminals condition
OFF 25 No continuity
ON Continuity exists
(2 ohms or less)
ACB04983AB
TSB Revision
HORN
HORN
M1542100201131
21 ± 4 N·m
ACB03498 AB
Removal
 Front bumper and radiator grille
assembly (Refer to GROUP 51 
Front Bumper Assembly and
Radiator Grille P.51-3).
>>A<< 1. Horn (LOW)

.
>>A<< HORN (LOW) INSTALLATION

Use the ground bolts as the mounting bolts for horn (LOW).
The ground bolts have "E" mark on the bolt heads.
AC805322
TSB Revision
REAR VIEW CAMERA
INSPECTION
HORN RELAY CHECK

M1542100400734
ACC01201
number condition
At no energization 34 No continuity
With current supply Continuity exists
[terminal 1 (+), (2 ohms or less)
terminal 2 ()]
Horn relay
4
3
2 1
ACC04615AE
REAR VIEW CAMERA

SPECIAL TOOLS
M1540902100234

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA
TSB Revision
REAR VIEW CAMERA

name
connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1540902300261
tents P.00-6.
M1540900300511
Trouble symptom Reference

page
Rear view camera image is not correctly displayed. P.54A-143
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Rear view camera image is not correctly displayed.
CAUTION  The wiring harness or connectors may have

Before replacing the multivision display, ensure loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
that the power supply circuit, the ground circuit, nals pushed back in the connector
and the communication circuit are normal.
(Check that the voltage is 10 V or more.) DIAGNOSIS
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) Required Special Tools:

When the screen of rear view camera is not shown
even if the shift lever <M/T> or selector lever <CVT>
is "R" (Reverse) position, the rear view camera, the
wiring harness, connectors, transmission range STEP 1. Self-connection check by MMES
switch or multivision display may be defective. "Cam- (1) Display the "Check Connectivity" screen (Refer to
era Interrupt" item on the MMES may be off. P.54A-179).
.
(2) Check that "Rear Camera" is "OK."
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (3) Move the shift lever <M/T> or selector lever
<CVT> to the "R" (reverse) position.
 The back-up light switch may be defective <M/T>
(4) Check that "Back Sensor" is "OK."
 The transmission range switch may be defective
<CVT> Q: Is the check result normal?
 The rear view camera may be defective YES : Go to Step 7.
 The multivision display may be defective NO <"---" is displayed on "Rear Camera"> : Go to
Step 2.
NO <"---" is displayed on "Back Sensor"> : Go to
Step 5.
TSB Revision
REAR VIEW CAMERA
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at rear view STEP 5. Check the back-up light switch <M/T> or
camera connector (ground terminal) transmission range switch <CVT>.
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the Check the continuity of the back-up light switch
wiring harness side. <M/T> or transmission range switch <CVT>. (Refer
(2) Measure the resistance between the rear view to GROUP 22B  Transmission P.22B-18, GROUP
camera connector (ground terminal) and ground. 23A  On-vehicle Service, Transmission Range
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or Switch Continuity Check P.23A-123)
less Q: Is the check result normal?
Q: Is the check result normal? YES : Go to Step 6.
YES : Go to Step 4. NO : Replace the back-up light switch <M/T> or
NO : Go to Step 3. transmission range switch <CVT>.
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line STEP 6. Check of short to power supply, short to
between rear view camera connector and the ground, and open circuit in REV line between
ground multivision display connector and back-up light
switch <M/T> or transmission range switch
Q: Is the check result normal? <CVT> connector
YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer
to GROUP 00  How to Use Q: Is the check result normal?
Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points  YES : Go to Step 7.
How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
P.00-13).
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. STEP 7. Trouble symptom recheck
Check that the display of rear view camera is shown
STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to normally.
ground, and open circuit in CACC, CMP, CMP+ Q: Is the check result normal?
line between multivision display connector and YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
rear view camera connector malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
YES : Go to Step 7. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. Malfunction P.00-13).
NO : Replace the rear view camera temporarily
and go to Step 8.
STEP 8. Trouble symptom recheck

Check that the display of rear view camera is shown
normally.
YES : Replace the rear view camera.
NO : Replace the multivision display.
TSB Revision
REAR VIEW CAMERA

M1540905500297
1
2
A
A
Section A – A 2
Claw
4.5 ± 0.5 N·m Claw
40 ± 4 in-lb
Note
: Claw positions 1
ACB04379 AB

1. Rear view camera cover  Liftgate trim (Refer to GROUP 52A
 Liftgate Trim P.52A-14)
2. Rear view camera
TSB Revision
ACCESSORY SOCKET
ACCESSORY SOCKET
M1542300200604

 Removal of Glove box (Refer to GROUP 52A  Glove Box  Removal of Glove box (Refer to GROUP 52A  Glove Box
P.52A-4) P.52A-4)
1
ACC03218AB
Removal
1. Accessory socket
TSB Revision
COLUMN SWITCH
COLUMN SWITCH
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1543100200335

name
a a. MB992744  DTC check.
b. MB992745
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision
COLUMN SWITCH

name
a
b pushing V.C.I. DTC check.
f. MB991825
ENTER key.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision
COLUMN SWITCH

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1543101200134
tents P.00-6.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
M1543101300119

(V.C.I.-Lite)
TSB Revision
COLUMN SWITCH
CAUTION
Data link connector
position.
MB992745, MB991910
MB992744, MB991824
MB992747, MB992748, MB991827 ACC02853 AB
color.

TROUBLE CODES
(V.C.I.-Lite)
display.
button.
TSB Revision
COLUMN SWITCH

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE TABLE
M1543100300581
NOTE: The ETACS-ECU sets a DTC.
B1763 Lighting switch P.54A-151
B1764 Wiper switch
DTC B1763: Lighting switch

DTC B1764: Wiper switch
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Check
communication circuit are normal. whether the diagnostic trouble code is set again.
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) CAUTION

 If the ETACS-ECU receives the lighting switch fail To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
signal, the ETACS-ECU sets DTC B1763. always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
 If the ETACS-ECU receives the wiper/washer (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
switch fail signal, the ETACS-ECU sets DTC ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
B1764. (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
.

(3) Erase the DTC.
 The column switch (with built-in column-ECU)
may be defective
(5) Check if DTC B1763 or B1764 is set.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : The trouble can be an intermittent
malfunction (GROUP 00  How to Cope
with Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13).
TSB Revision
COLUMN SWITCH
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Check

whether the diagnostic trouble code is set again.
Check again if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Replace the windshield wiper and washer switch.
(2) Erase the DTC.
(4) Check if DTC is set.
Q: Is the DTC set again?
M1543100700857
CAUTION
 To remove the driver air bag module, refer to GROUP 52B  Service Precautions P.52B-5 and
Driver Air Bag Module and Clock Spring P.52B-232.
 Steering wheel at straight-ahead position check  Installation of steering wheel assembly (Refer to GROUP
 Removal of steering column lower cover, steering column 52B  Driver’s Air Bag Module and Clock Spring
upper cover (Refer to GROUP 37  Steering Column P.52B-232)
Shaft Assembly P.37-64)  Installation of steering column lower cover, steering col-
 Removal of steering wheel assembly (Refer to GROUP umn upper cover (Refer to GROUP 37  Steering Column
52B  Driver’s Air Bag Module and Clock Spring Shaft Assembly P.37-64)
P.52B-232)  Steering wheel at straight-ahead position check
ACD01307 AB
Removal Steps
<<A>> >>A<< 1. Column switch assembly
2. Clock spring (Refer to GROUP 52B
 Driver’s Air Bag Module and
Clock Spring P.52B-232.)
TSB Revision
COLUMN SWITCH
REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

.
<<A>> COLUMN SWITCH ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

1. Using a wrench or similar tool, pinch and lift the band clump
pin shown in the figure.
Band clump pin
ACD02061AB
2. Unclip the column switch assembly (five clips).

Column switch assembly 3. Remove the column switch assembly by pulling it.
NOTE ACD00635
: Claw positions
Section A – A
Claw
ACD01298
ACD01674 AC

.
>>A<< COLUMN SWITCH ASSEMBLY INSTALLA-

TION
When installing a new column switch
Groove  With the retaining pin of the band clump pin installed, install
the column switch by securely fitting the claw on the column
switch into the groove on the column shaft. Then, remove
the retaining pin and release the band clump pin.
Retaining
pin
ACD01936AC
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
When installing the removed column switch

Groove 1. Using a wrench or similar tool, pinch and lift the band clump
2 pin shown in the figure.
1 Band clump pin 2. Install the column switch by securely fitting the claw on the
column switch into the groove on the column shaft.
3
3. Release the band clump pin.
ACD01975AC
INSPECTION
COLUMN SWITCH INSPECTION
M1543101900036
The switches on the column switch can be evaluated
by reading out a DTC, which is set in the
ETACS-ECU.
RADIO AND CD PLAYER

SPECIAL TOOLS
M1542000602599

name
a
b b. For checking power supply circuit
Harness set
a. Check harness c. For checking power supply circuit
b. LED harness d. For connecting a locally sourced
c. LED harness tester
c adapter
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
DIAGNOSIS
M1544004800681
tents P.00-6.
AUDIO ERROR CODES

M1544018900368
If the radio and CD player detects any malfunction in
itself or the inserted CD, the error codes below will
be shown on the display.
RADIO AND CD PLAYER-RELATED ERROR CODE

Error code Cause Cause of trouble and its solution
CHECK DISC Focus error These error codes will be shown if there is any problem with
DISC ERROR Abnormal disc the CD or there is excessive vibration on the vehicle. If the
error codes are not displayed when the vehicle is stopped and
another CD is inserted, there is a problem with the CD. Check
if there is any of the following problems with the CD.
 Contamination, scratch, or deformation
 Formation of moisture or grease
Repair the CD and insert it again. Then, check that no error
appears.
INTERNAL E Mechanical error This error codes will be shown if there is any internal
mechanical or electrical problem in the radio and CD player.
Replace the radio and CD player check that no error codes
are shown.
HEAT ERROR Protection against high If the internal temperature is extremely high, this error code
temperature will be shown. Turn off the radio and CD player and wait until
they cool down. Wait for a while, and then turn on the unit
again. Check that the same error does not appear.
ERROR DC Detection abnormal output This error code will be shown if the radio and CD player has
to the speaker an internal error or is contaminated with the foreign material,
and there is a problem with output to the speaker. If it is
contaminated with the foreign material, turn OFF the power.
Dry the foreign material if it is liquid, and remove it if it is solid.
Then, check if the error code is displayed. If the error code is
displayed, replace the radio and CD player.
iPod-RELATED ERROR CODE

NO SONG No playable music file is No playable music file is stored in the iPod. Store music files
found. to the iPod.
VER ERROR iPod cannot be iPod itself or software is not supported. Use the supported
recognized iPod.
USB MEMORY DEVICE-RELATED ERROR CODE

NO SONG No playable music file is No playable music file is stored in the USB memory. Store
found. music files to the USB memory.
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER

FILE ERROR Playback of unplayable Displayed when the playback of unplayable file such as a
file (copyright protected copyright protected file is attempted. The error code is
file, etc.) is attempted. displayed approximately for 3 seconds, and then a next
playable file is played automatically.
UNSUPPORTE Unsupported device The USB memory is not supported. Use the supported USB
D DEVICE memory.
UNSUPPORTE Unsupported format
D FORMAT
USB BUS PWR Overcurrent abnormality There is a communication error. Proceed to "An audio file,
which is stored in the USB memory/iPod, cannot be played."
(Refer to P.54A-162 <Vehicles with radio and CD player> or
P.54A-176 <Vehicles with MMES>.)
LSI ERROR Internal error This error code will be displayed when there is a problem in
the LSI. If it is displayed even after the radio and CD player is
powered on, replace the radio and CD player.

M1544004902930

Procedure page
No.
Power is not turned ON when the power switch is turned ON. 1 P.54A-156
No sound is heard. 2 P.54A-158
The radio broadcasting can not be received. 3 P.54A-160
Audio illuminations does not work normally. 4 P.54A-161
An audio file, which is stored in the USB memory/iPod, cannot be played. 5 P.54A-162
An audio file, which is connected through the external input (AUX) terminal, 6 P.54A-162
cannot be played.
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: Power is not turned ON when the power switch is turned ON.
.

Whenever the radio and CD player is replaced,  The power supply circuit may be defective
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground  The radio and CD player may be defective
circuit and the communication circuit are normal.
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) DIAGNOSIS

If the power for radio and CD player cannot be turned Required Special Tools:
ON, the radio and CD player, or power supply circuit  MB992006: Extra fine probe
for radio and CD player may have a problem.  MB991223: Harness set
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
STEP 1. Voltage measurement at radio and CD STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to
player connector (ACC terminal) ground, and open circuit in ACC line between
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the ACC relay and radio and CD player connector
wiring harness side. Q: Is the check result normal?
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
(3) Check the voltage between the radio and CD malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
player connector (ACC terminal) and ground. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
OK: The voltage should measure approxi- Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage). Malfunction P.00-13).
Q: Is the check result normal? NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO <vehicles without KOS> : Go to Step 2. STEP 5. Voltage measurement at radio and CD
NO <vehicles with KOS> : Go to Step 3. player connector (+B terminal)
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
STEP 2. Check of short to power supply, short to wiring harness side.
ground, and open circuit in ACC line between (2) Check the voltage between the radio and CD
ignition switch (ACC) and radio and CD player player connector (+B terminal) and ground.
connector OK: The voltage should measure approxi-
Q: Is the check result normal? mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage).
YES : Refer to Inspection Procedure "Malfunction Q: Is the check result normal?
of the ignition switch power supply system." YES : Go to Step 7.
P.54A-9 NO : Go to Step 6.
STEP 6. Check of short to power supply, short to
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the KOS ground, and open circuit in +B line between
diagnostic trouble code fusible link and radio and CD player connector
CAUTION Q: Is the check result normal?
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" to GROUP 00  How to Use
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to P.00-13).
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-15." NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
(3) Check that the KOS&OSS-ECU sets a DTC.
STEP 7. Check of short to open circuit in GND
line between radio and CD player connector and
position.
ground
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Troubleshoot the KOS&OSS-ECU (Refer to
YES : Go to Step 8.
GROUP 42B  Troubleshooting P.42B-13). NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
NO : Go to Step 4.

Check if the radio and CD player power is turned ON.
Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
P.00-13).
NO : Replace the radio and CD player.
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
Inspection Procedure 2: No sound is heard.

.

Whenever the radio and CD player is replaced,  The radio and CD player may be defective
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground  The speaker may be defective
circuit and the communication circuit are normal.  The wiring harness or connectors may have
.

If the audio sound is not output, the radio and CD
player may have a problem. In addition, if any of the
speakers is short-circuited, the protection circuit
inside the radio and CD player disables all the
speakers to sound. Therefore, if all the speakers do
not output sound, the speaker circuit may be shorted
or the speaker may be defective.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Checking with audio speaker test

Perform the audio speaker test, and check which speaker does
not output the sound. Refer to P.54A-209.
NO (No speakers sound.) : Go to Step 2.
NO (No sound is heard from one of the speakers.) : Go
to Step 4.
STEP 2. Check the speaker.

(1) Remove the speaker. Refer to P.54A-211.
(2) Check that the speaker outputs the noise when the voltage
of 5 V is applied to the speaker connector terminal.
Q: Do the speaker output the noise?
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Replace the speaker.
5V
AC707572AB
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
STEP 3. Check the wiring harness between the speaker

connector terminal and the radio and CD player connector
terminal.
 Check of short circuit in DFR+, DFR- line front door speaker
(RH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Front
door speaker (RH)>
 Check of short circuit in DFL+, DFL- line front door speaker
(LH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Front
door speaker (LH)>
 Check of short circuit in RR+, RR- line rear door speaker
(RH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Rear
door speaker (RH)>
 Check of short circuit in RL+, RL- line rear door speaker
(LH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Rear
door speaker (LH)>
YES : Go to Step 6.

Follow the speaker test to check which speaker does not
sound.
YES : Go to Step 5.
5V
AC707572AB
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER

connector terminal and the radio and CD player connector
terminal.
Follow the speaker test to check which speaker circuit is defec-
tive.
 Check of open circuit in DFR+, DFR- line front door speaker
(RH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Front
door speaker (RH)>
 Check of open circuit in DFL+, DFL- line front door speaker
(LH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Front
door speaker (LH)>
 Check of open circuit in RR+, RR- line rear door speaker
(RH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Rear
door speaker (RH)>
 Check of open circuit in RL+, RL- line rear door speaker
(LH) connector and radio and CD player connector. <Rear
door speaker (LH)>
YES : Go to Step 6.

Check if the sound is output from all the speakers.
Inspection Procedure 3: The radio broadcasting can not be received.

Whenever the radio and CD player is replaced,  The antenna rod may be defective
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground  The antenna base may be defective
circuit and the communication circuit are normal.  The antenna feeder may be defective
.
 The radio and CD player may be defective
In case of FM/AM radio broadcasting cannot be DIAGNOSIS
received., antenna rod, antenna base, antenna
feeder or radio and CD player may have a problem. Required Special Tools:
NOTE: The radio wave may not be received if the
vehicle is placed in the area which is exposed to a
special electric field. Thus, check that the radio
broadcasting can be received using the radio of STEP 1. Check the state of the antenna rod and
another vehicle before carrying out diagnosis. antenna base.
. Q: Is the antenna assembled?
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Assemble antenna rod and antenna base.
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
STEP 2. Check to see if inspections are taking STEP 5. Check the connection of the antenna
place is an area exposed to special electric feeder’s plug and radio and CD player.
fields. Q: Is the antenna feeder’s plug thoroughly connected
Q: Is the reception area exposed to special electric to the radio and CD player?
fields? YES : Go to Step 6.
YES : Go to Step 3. NO : Thoroughly connect the antenna feeder’s
NO : Go to Step 4. plug and the radio and CD player.
STEP 3. Move the vehicle and check the radio. STEP 6. Substitute a known good radio and CD
Move the vehicle to a good reception area that is not player, and check the trouble symptom.
exposed to special electric fields. Q: Is the check result normal?
Q: Is the check result normal? YES : Replace the radio and CD player.
YES : Diagnosis complete. NO : Either repair or replace the antenna rod and
NO : Go to Step 4. antenna base.
STEP 4. Check if there is any damage to the

antenna rod, antenna base and antenna feeder.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Replace the antenna rod, antenna base and
antenna feeder.
Inspection Procedure 4: Audio illuminations does not work normally.
CAUTION  MB991223: Harness set

Whenever the radio and CD player is replaced,
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground STEP 1. Check that the taillights illuminate.
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Diagnose the taillights. (Refer to
If the taillights illuminate, illumination signal is sent
from the ETACS-ECU to the radio and CD player. P.54A-102.)
This switches the illumination of the radio and CD
player from day mode to night mode. If the mode is STEP 2. Check of short to power supply, short to
switched, the illumination signal line, the ground, and open circuit in ILL+ line between
ETACS-ECU or the radio/CD player may be defec- radio and CD player connector and ETACS-ECU
tive. (taillight relay)
.
 The radio and CD player may be defective NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
 The wiring harness or connectors may have STEP 3. Combination meter check
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- When the taillights are activated, check that the com-
nals pushed back in the connector bination meter switches from day mode to night
mode.
DIAGNOSIS
Required Special Tools: YES : Go to Step 4.
 MB992006: Extra fine probe NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
STEP 4. Substitute the ETACS-ECU with good

one, and check the trouble symptom.
Substitute the ETACS-ECU with good one. When the
taillights illuminate, check that the illumination of the
radio and CD player is switched from day mode to
night mode.
Inspection Procedure 5: An audio file, which is stored in the USB memory/iPod, cannot be played.
CAUTION STEP 2. Check the USB cable.

Whenever the radio and CD player is replaced, Check that the USB cable is connected to the radio
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground and CD player normally. Or check the USB cable for
circuit and the communication circuit are normal. damage such as bend.
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) Q: Is the check result normal?

If the sound replay is impossible with the USB/i Pod YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Replace or repair the USB cable.
mode, the USB cable or radio and CD player may be
defective.
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check that the music STEP 3. Retest the system
file (the customer tried to replay) can be replayed. Check whether an audio file, which is stored in the
USB memory/iPod, can be played.
.

 The radio and CD player may be defective YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
 The USB cable may be defective malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
DIAGNOSIS Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
STEP 1. Check if the error message is displayed
on the monitor.
(Refer to P.54A-167.)
Q: Is the error message displayed on the monitor?
YES : Refer to error massage (refer to
P.54A-167), take necessary steps. If the
USB memory/iPod is still not be played, go
to Step 2.
NO : Go to Step 2.
Inspection Procedure 6: An audio file, which is connected through the external input (AUX) terminal,
cannot be played.

Whenever the radio and CD player is replaced, If an audio file is not played through the external
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground input (AUX) terminal, the radio and CD player may
circuit and the communication circuit are normal. be defective.
.
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
 The radio and CD player may be defective.
RADIO AND CD PLAYER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
M1544010900911
NOTE: When the radio and CD player are replaced,
always turn the ignition switch to the ON position
once and then carry out the operation check.
 Removal of Instrument center panel (Refer to GROUP  Installation of Instrument center panel (Refer to GROUP
52A  Instrument Center Panel assembly P.52A-5) 52A  Instrument Center Panel assembly P.52A-5)
1.5 ± 0.5 N·m

13 ± 4 in-lb
3.0 ± 1.0 N·m

27 ± 8 in-lb
1.5 ± 0.5 N·m

13 ± 4 in-lb
3
1
3.0 ± 1.0 N·m

Note 27 ± 8 in-lb
: Clip positions
ACC03249AB
Removal Steps Removal Steps

1. Radio and CD 2. Bracket (LH/RH)
player/Bracket 3. Radio and CD player
USB CABLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

M1549101300441
<Vehicles with hands free-ECU>

Refer to Hands-Free Interface system P.54A-207.
TSB Revision
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
<Vehicles without hands free-ECU>
ACC06752AB
Removal steps
 Radio and CD player or
multivision display (Refer to
P.54A-163 <Vehicles with
radio and CD player> or
P.54A-186 <Vehicles with
multivision display>)
1. USB cable
TSB Revision
MMES
MMES
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1544000600674

name
a
Harness set
c adapter
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1546001500052
tents P.00-6.
PRECAUTIONS ON SERVICING MMES
M1546303000139
PRIOR TO DISCONNECTING THE

VEHICLE BATTERY
A lot of information, which is set by customer, is
stored in the MMES. If the battery terminals are dis-
connected, this information may disappear. Prior to
the terminal disconnection, the agreement of the
customer should be obtained.
TSB Revision
MMES
DIAGNOSIS TIPS CONCERNING THE

NAVIGATION FUNCTION
1. To pinpoint current location precisely on the navigation
screen, at least four GPS signals are needed. If the GPS
signals are not received due to poor satellite communication
or driving conditions, wrong current location will be
displayed although the MMES is OK. Therefore, prior to
troubleshooting, ask your customer in which conditions the
system is used.
GPS signal status can be checked on the MMES GPS
Position screen.
How to check
(1) Select "Others" from the Settings screen.
Settings 12:00 Back
Audio Phone
Display Adj. Bluetooth
Volume and Beeps Clock
Select Language Others
ACC03240AB
(2) Select "Check Connectivity" from the Others screen.

Others 12:00 Back
AV Screen Navigation Guide Interrupt ON
Unit Information
Check Connectivity
Reset to Factory Setting
ACC03241AB
(3) Confirm that "GPS" is "Connection" on the Check

Check Connectivity 12:00 Back
Connectivity screen, and then select the "GPS".
GPS No connection
Connection NOTE: If "GPS" is "No connection", check whether the
Speed Sensor --- MMES is connected to the GPS antenna properly.
Back Sensor ---
Gyro Sensor ON
Illumination ---
Rear Camera ---
ACC03242AB
TSB Revision
MMES
(4) The GPS Position screen is displayed. Check whether at

GPS Position 12:00 Back
least four GPS signals are received.
Number of Satellites Calculation
3 dimension
Positioning Satellites Latitude
9 35.53.49N
Standby Satellites Longitude
0 139.37.46E
ACC03243AB
2. If the system is not OK, diagnose the system according to

the trouble symptom chart.
ERROR DISPLAY
M1546313000077
If the multivision display detects an error under the  When a CD/DVD is loaded/ejected
conditions below, the error will be displayed.  When a CD/DVD is played
 When the multivision display is activated  When an audio file, which is stored in an SD
 When the OPEN/TILT key is operated on the mul- memory card or an USB device, is played
tivision display  When you use a hands-free system
Error display Cause Action
Check Map SD Memory Card When an error is detected in Load the map SD memory card
the map SD memory card again.
(loaded in the right SD card
slot)
Please open panel. An error is detected when Press "Panel Open/Close" to open
the panel is opened. the panel once.
Please eject disc. A mechanical error occurred Eject the disk.
in the DVD loading
mechanism.
Disc read error.  The disc is scratched Replace the disk.
 When a disk of
unsupported format is
attempted to play.
 The disk does not contain
any supported file.
This disc can not be played. Improper region code 
Please change the parental level to Playback of the disk is Change the parental level setting on
play this disc. limited under parental level. the multivision display.
Unplayable file. When an unsupported file is 
attempted to play. (collapsed
file, difference between file
extension and file format,
unsupported bit rate, etc.)
SD memory card read error.  When the SD memory Load the SD memory card again.
card cannot be
recognized
 When the file system is
FAT.
TSB Revision
MMES
Error display Cause Action

Stopped. The control panel is opened Close the panel. (The device cannot
while the SD memory card is access the SD memory card while
played. the panel is opened)
Check USB memory or iPod.  When the USB memory or Insert the USB memory stick or iPod
the iPod cannot be again.
recognized
 When the file system is
FAT.
 When a device other than
an USB memory stick or
an iPod is connected
 When a device is
connected via an USB
hub.
The call failed.  When phone call fails. Check the mobile phone settings.
 When you cannot talk via
the phone.
Unable to switch to Handset mode. When you fail to switch
between the hands-free call
and mobile phone call.
Could not switch to Handsfree mode.  When you fail to switch from
Please check your phone. the mobile phone call to the
hands-free call.
CHECK CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS

M1546001802134
Symptom Inspection Reference

procedure page
number
Power is not turned ON when the power switch is turned ON. 1 P.54A-168
Current location is not displayed correctly. 2 P.54A-170
No sound is heard. 3 P.54A-171
The radio broadcasting can not be received. 4 P.54A-174
CD/DVD cannot be played. 5 P.54A-175
An audio file, which is stored in the USB memory/iPod, cannot be played. 6 P.54A-176
An audio file, which is stored in the SD memory card, cannot be played. 7 P.54A-176
The hands-free cellular phone system does not operate normally. 8 P.54A-178
The screen brightness is not changed in conjunction with the taillights. 9 P.54A-178
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: Power is not turned ON when the power switch is turned ON.
CAUTION circuit and the communication circuit are normal

.
Whenever the multivision display is replaced,

ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground
TSB Revision
MMES
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to

When the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or ON ground, and open circuit in ACC line between
position, if the screen is not displayed at all, the ACC relay and multivision display connector
power supply circuit or multivision display may have
a problem.
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
 The power supply circuit may be defective Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
 The multivision display may be defective Malfunction P.00-13).
DIAGNOSIS
Required Special Tools: STEP 5. Voltage measurement at multivision
 MB992006: Extra fine probe display connector (+B terminal)
 MB991223: Harness set (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
(2) Check the voltage between the multivision
STEP 1. Voltage measurement at multivision
display connector (+B terminal) and ground.
display connector (ACC terminal)
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the OK: The voltage should measure approxi-
wiring harness side. mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage).
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. Q: Is the check result normal?
(3) Check the voltage between the multivision YES : Go to Step 7.
display connector (ACC terminal) and ground. NO : Go to Step 6.
mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage). STEP 6. Check of short to power supply, short to
Q: Is the check result normal? ground, and open circuit in +B line between
YES : Go to Step 5. fusible link and multivision display connector
NO <Vehicles without KOS> : Go to Step 2. Q: Is the check result normal?
NO <Vehicles with KOS> : Go to Step 3. YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer
STEP 2. Check of short to power supply, short to Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
ground, and open circuit in ACC line between How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
ignition switch (ACC) and multivision display P.00-13).
connector NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
YES : Refer to Inspection Procedure "Malfunction STEP 7. Resistance measurement at multivision
of the ignition switch power supply system." display connector (GND terminal)
P.54A-9 (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. wiring harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the multivision
display connector (GND terminal) and ground.
diagnostic trouble code OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or
Check that the KOS&OSS-ECU sets a DTC. less
Q: Is the DTC set? Q: Is the check result normal?

YES : Diagnose the KOS&OSS-ECU. Refer to YES : Go to Step 9.
GROUP 42B, Troubleshooting P.42B-13. NO : Go to Step 8.
NO : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
MMES
STEP 8. Check of open circuit in GND line STEP 9. Retest the system
between multivision display connector and Check if the multivision display power is turned ON.
ground Q: Is the check result normal?
Q: Is the check result normal? YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer
YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer to GROUP 00  How to Use
to GROUP 00  How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points  How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13).
P.00-13). NO : Replace the multivision display.
Inspection Procedure 2: Current location is not displayed correctly.
CAUTION  Orientation signal, which is received through the

Whenever the multivision display is replaced, GPS antenna, is abnormal.
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground  Abnormal vehicle speed signal sent by the com-
circuit and the communication circuit are normal bination meter
.  Defective gyro sensor (integrated in the multivi-
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) sion display)
If a current location (and vehicle direction) is not dis- .
played correctly, one of the following malfunctions TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

may be present.  The GPS antenna may be defective
 The multivision display may be defective
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Self-connection check by MMES

(1) Display the "Check Connectivity" screen (Refer to
P.54A-179).
(2) Check that "GPS" is "Connection."
(3) Drive the vehicle to check whether "OK" is displayed on
"Speed Sensor" item.
(4) Check that "Gyro Sensor" is "OK."
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO <"No connection" is displayed on "GPS"> : Go to
Step 2.
NO <"---" is displayed on "Speed Sensor"> : Go to Step
3.
NO <"---" is displayed on "Gyro Sensor"> : Replace the
multivision display.
STEP 2. Check the GPS antenna.

Check the GPS antenna for damage.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Replace the GPS antenna.
TSB Revision
MMES
STEP 3. Check of short to power supply, short to ground,

and open circuit in SPD line between multivision display
connector and combination meter connector
YES : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Check the signal reception state of the GPS

antenna.
Check whether at least four GPS signals are received on the
MMES GSP position screen.
How to check
1. Display the "Check Connectivity" screen (Refer to
P.54A-179).
2. Press "GPS" button to display how the GPS signal are
received on the GPS position screen.
3. Check whether at least four GPS signals are received.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Move the vehicle in an open outside area where GPS
data can be received from satellites. Then check
whether current location is pinpointed. If not, proceed
to Step 5.
STEP 5. Reset the MMES and check the trouble symptom.

CAUTION
If the MMES is reset, all the data stored by customer will
disappear. Therefore, prior to the reset, the agreement of
the customer should be obtained.
1.Reset the MMES.(Refer to P.54A-183.)
2.Check whether current location is pinpointed.
YES : The diagnosis is complete.
Inspection Procedure 3: No sound is heard.

Whenever the multivision display is replaced, If the sound is not output, the multivision display may
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground have a problem. In addition, if any of the speakers is
circuit and the communication circuit are normal short-circuited, the protection circuit inside the multi-
.
vision display disables all the speakers to sound.
Therefore, if all the speakers do not output sound,
the speaker circuit may be shorted or the speaker
may be defective. In some cases, the sound is output
depending on sources, thus use the radio, CD/DVD,
and others to check if the sound is output.
.
TSB Revision
MMES
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS  The wiring harness or connectors may have

 The multivision display may be defective loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
 The speaker may be defective nals pushed back in the connector
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check a trouble spot.

Check which speaker does not sound.
Q: Which speaker does not sound?
NO (No speakers sound.) : Go to Step 2.
NO (No sound is heard from one of the speakers.) : Go
to Step 5.
STEP 2. Check the multivision display operation.

Q: Check the sources from which the sound is not output.
No sound only from radio : Perform Inspection Procedure
4 "The radio broadcasting can not be received."
No sound only when the CD/DVD is played : Perform
Inspection Procedure 5 "CD/DVD cannot be played."
No sound only when the USB memory/iPod is played :
Perform Inspection Procedure 6 "An audio file, which
is stored in the SD memory card/USB memory/iPod,
cannot be played." (Refer to P.54A-176.)
No sound only when the SD memory card is played :
Perform Inspection Procedure 7 "An audio file, which
is stored in the SD memory card, cannot be played."
No sound from any of the sources : Go to Step 3.

YES : Go to Step 4.
5V
AC707572AB
TSB Revision
MMES

connector terminal and the multivision display connector
terminal.
 Check of short circuit in DFR+, DFR line front door
speaker (RH) connector and multivision display connector.
<Front door speaker (RH)>
 Check of short circuit in DFL+, DFL line front door speaker
(LH) connector and multivision display connector. <Front
door speaker (LH)>
 Check of short circuit in RR+, RR line rear door speaker
(RH) connector and multivision display connector. <Rear
door speaker (RH)>
 Check of short circuit in RL+, RL line rear door speaker
(LH) connector and multivision display connector. <Rear
door speaker (LH)>
YES : Go to Step 7.

Check which speaker does not sound.
YES : Go to Step 6.
5V
AC707572AB
TSB Revision
MMES

connector terminal and the multivision display connector
terminal.
Check which speaker circuit is defective.
 Check of open circuit in DFR+, DFR line front door
speaker (RH) connector and multivision display connector.
<Front door speaker (RH)>
 Check of open circuit in DFL+, DFL line front door speaker
(LH) connector and multivision display connector. <Front
door speaker (LH)>
 Check of open circuit in RR+, RR line rear door speaker
(RH) connector and multivision display connector. <Rear
door speaker (RH)>
 Check of open circuit in RL+, RL line rear door speaker
(LH) connector and multivision display connector. <Rear
door speaker (LH)>
YES : Go to Step 7.

Check if the sound is output from all the speakers.
Inspection Procedure 4: The radio broadcasting can not be received.
CAUTION  The multivision display may be defective

Whenever the multivision display is replaced,
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground DIAGNOSIS
circuit and the communication circuit are normal
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) STEP 1. Check the state of the antenna rod and
antenna base.
In case of FM/AM radio broadcasting cannot be
received., antenna rod, antenna base, antenna Q: Is the antenna assembled?
feeder or multivision display may have a problem. YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Assemble antenna rod and antenna base.
NOTE: The radio wave may not be received if the
vehicle is placed in the area which is exposed to a
special electric field. Thus, check that the radio STEP 2. Check to see if inspections are taking
broadcasting can be received using the radio of place is an area exposed to special electric
another vehicle before carrying out diagnosis. fields.
. Q: Is the reception area exposed to special electric
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS fields?
 The antenna rod may be defective YES : Go to Step 3.
 The antenna base may be defective NO : Go to Step 4.
 The antenna feeder may be defective
TSB Revision
MMES
STEP 3. Move the vehicle and check the radio. STEP 5. Check the connection of the antenna
Move the vehicle to a good reception area that is not feeder’s plug and multivision display.
exposed to special electric fields. Q: Is the antenna feeder’s plug thoroughly connected
Q: Is the check result normal? to the multivision display?
YES : Diagnosis complete. YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Go to Step 4. NO : Thoroughly connect the antenna feeder’s
plug and the multivision display.
STEP 4. Check if there is any damage to the
antenna rod, antenna base and antenna feeder. STEP 6. Substitute a known good multivision
display, and check the trouble symptom.
YES : Go to Step 5. Q: Is the check result normal?
NO : Replace the antenna rod, antenna base and YES : Replace the multivision display.
antenna feeder. NO : Either repair or replace the antenna rod and
antenna base.
Inspection Procedure 5: CD/DVD cannot be played.
CAUTION STEP 3. Check the CD/DVD.

Whenever the multivision display is replaced,  Check that the DVD has the correct region code.
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground  Check if the CD corresponds with the multivision
circuit and the communication circuit are normal display.
.

The CD/DVD or the multivision display may be YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Use a DVD with a correct region code. Or,
defective.
use a CD corresponds with the multivision
.
display.
 The CD/DVD may be defective
 The multivision display may be defective STEP 4. Check the CD/DVD.
Check that the CD/DVD is free of dirt or scratch.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Clean the disc, use a disc without scratches
STEP 1. Check if the error message is displayed and burrs, or remove the burrs from the
on the monitor. disc, and then reinsert the disc.
Q: Is the error message displayed on the monitor? STEP 5. Temporarily replace the CD /DVD with
YES : Refer to error massage (refer to
another CD or DVD, and check the trouble
P.54A-167), take necessary steps. If the CD symptom.
or DVD is still not be played, go to Step 2. Check that the new CD/DVD is played normally
NO : Go to Step 2. when it is inserted.
STEP 2. Check the CD/DVD insertion surface. YES : Replace the used CD/DVD.
Check that the CD/DVD is inserted with the correct NO : Go to Step 6.
surface facing up.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Check the disc insertion surface, and
reinsert the disc. (In case of a single-sided
disc, insert it with its label facing upward.)
TSB Revision
MMES
STEP 6. Temporarily replace the multivision

display, and check the trouble symptom.
After temporary replacement of the multivision dis-
play, check that the new CD/DVD is played normally
when it is inserted.
YES : Replace the multivision display.
NO : Replace the CD/DVD.
Inspection Procedure 6: An audio file, which is stored in the USB memory/iPod, cannot be played.
CAUTION NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check that the music

Whenever the multivision display is replaced, file (the customer tried to replay) can be replayed.
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground .
circuit and the communication circuit are normal TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT)  The USB cable may be defective
If the sound replay is impossible with the USB/iPod  The iPod is not supported
mode, the USB cable or multivision display may be
defective.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check whether the iPod is supported.

Check whether the iPod is supported.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Use the supported iPod.
STEP 2. Check if the error message is displayed on the

monitor.
YES : Refer to error massage (refer to P.54A-167), take
necessary steps. If the USB memory/iPod is still not
be played, go to Step 3.
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check the USB cable.

Check that the USB cable is connected to the multivision dis-
play normally. Or check the USB cable for damage such as
bend.
YES : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
MMES

Check whether an audio file, which is stored in the USB mem-
ory/iPod, can be played.
Inspection Procedure 7: An audio file, which is stored in the SD memory card, cannot be played.
CAUTION NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check that the music

Whenever the multivision display is replaced, file (the customer tried to replay) can be replayed.
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground .
circuit and the communication circuit are normal TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT)  The SD card may be defective
If the sound replay is impossible with the SD memory
card mode, the SD card or multivision display may
be defective.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check if the error message is displayed on the

monitor.
YES : Refer to error massage (refer to P.54A-167), take
necessary steps. If the SD memory card is still not be
played, go to Step 2.
NO : Go to Step 2.

Check whether an audio file, which is stored in the SD memory
card, can be played.
TSB Revision
MMES
Inspection Procedure 8: The hands-free cellular phone system does not operate normally.
.

Whenever the multivision display is replaced,  Pairing with the Bluetooth device has not been
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground completed.
circuit and the communication circuit are normal  The multivision display may be defective
 The Bluetooth device may be defective
.

If a hands-free cellular phone system does not func-
tion correctly, a Bluetooth device is not paired or
the multivision display may be defective.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check whether the Bluetooth device is

supported.
Check whether the Bluetooth device is supported.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Use the supported Bluetooth device.
STEP 2. Reset the MMES and check the trouble symptom.

CAUTION
1.Reset the MMES. (Refer to P.54A-183.)
2.Carry out the necessary pairing for the Bluetooth device.
3.Check whether the hands-free cellular phone system works
normally.
YES : The diagnosis is complete.
Inspection Procedure 9: The screen brightness is not changed in conjunction with the taillights.

Whenever the multivision display is replaced,  The multivision display may be defective
ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground  The ETACS-ECU may be defective
circuit and the communication circuit are normal  The wiring harness or connectors may have
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) nals pushed back in the connector
If the screen brightness is not changed in conjunction
with the taillights, the wiring harness wires, the con- DIAGNOSIS
nector(s), the multivision display or the ETACS-ECU
may be defective. Required Special Tools:
.
TSB Revision
MMES
STEP 1. Self-connection check by MMES STEP 3. Retest the system

(1) Display the "Check Connectivity" screen (Refer to Check whether the screen brightness is changed in
P.54A-179). conjunction with the taillights.
(2) If the taillights illuminate, "Illumination" should be Q: Is the check result normal?
"OK". YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
YES : Replace the multivision display. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
NO : Go to Step 2. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
ground, and open circuit in ILL+ line between
multivision display connector and ETACS-ECU
(taillight relay)
YES : Go to Step 3.
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION

M1546314300015
This function allows you to check which device and sensors are
connected to the multivision display. Furthermore, this function
indicates how the GPS signals are received.
How to check connections

1. Press "MENU" button to display the menu screen.
2. Press "Settings" button to display the "Settings" screen.
12:00 Back
Navigation Phone Settings
Day/Night Display
ACC03841AB
3. Press "Others" button to display the "Others" screen.

Settings 12:00 Back
Audio Phone
ACC03240AB
TSB Revision
MMES
4. Press "Check Connectivity" button to display the "Check

Others 12:00 Back
Connectivity" screen. Activate the connection checks on
"GPS", "Speed Sensor", "Back Sensor", "Gyro Sensor",
Unit Information
"Illumination" and "Rear Camera" items.
Check Connectivity GPS
Reset to Factory Setting  Check whether the GPS antenna is connected.
If a GSP antenna connection is recognized, "Connection"
will be displayed. If it cannot be recognized, "No connec-
tion" will be displayed.
ACC03241AB
Check Connectivity 12:00 Back
GPS No connection
Speed Sensor ---
Back Sensor ---
Gyro Sensor ON
Illumination ---
Rear Camera ---
ACC03242AC
 Press "GPS" button to display how the GPS signal are

GPS Position 12:00 Back
received on the GPS position screen.
Number of Satellites Calculation
3 dimension
Speed Sensor
Positioning Satellites Latitude  Displays whether the vehicle speed signal is received. 
9 35.53.49N
If the vehicle speed signal is received from the combination
Standby Satellites Longitude
0 139.37.46E meter during driving, "OK" will be displayed. If it cannot be
received, "---" will be displayed.
Back Sensor
ACC03243AB  Check whether the transmission range switch <CVT> or the
back-up light switch <M/T> is connected.
If the R position signal is received when the selector lever
<CVT> or the shift lever <MT> is moved to the "R" position,
"OK" will be displayed. If it cannot be received, "---" will be
displayed.
Gyro Sensor
 Displays how the gyro sensor incorporated in the multivi-
sion display is. 
If the gyro sensor is normal, "OK" will be displayed. If the
gyro sensor is not abnormal, "---" will be displayed.
Illumination
 Displays whether the illumination signal is received. 
If the TAIL ON signal is received when the lighting switch is
turned to the "TAIL" position, "OK" will be displayed. If it
cannot be received, "---" will be displayed.
Rear Camera
 Displays whether the rear view camera is connected. 
If the rear view camera connection is recognized, "Connec-
tion" will be displayed. If it cannot be recognized, "No con-
nection" will be displayed.
TSB Revision
MMES
PAIRING THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE

M1544405500573
How to activate or deactivate the pairing with a

Bluetooth device through the multivision
display
By operating the multivision display by means of the touch-
screen, you can activate or deactivate the pairing with a Blue-
tooth device.
NOTE: .
 A maximum of five Bluetooth devices can be paired.
 Some Bluetooth device are not supported.
 When a Bluetooth device is not powered on, the pairing
cannot activated.
How to pair
.
How to pair a device on "Phone" screen

2. Press "Phone" button to display the "Phone" screen.
12:00 Back
Day/Night Display
ACC03841AC
3. Press "Pair Phone" button.

Phone 12:00 Back
4. Search a valid Bluetooth device by operating it. Select
"Car-Navi" on the search result, and then press "OK" button.
Call History Volume NOTE: For how to operate a Bluetooth device, follow man-
ufacturer's instructions.
Handset Phonebook Pair Phone
5. Follow instructions on the multivision display to press "YES"
Dial Number Paired Phones
button.
6. On completion, "XXXX (Bluetooth device description)
ACC03842AB
paired as 1 (Paring number)" will be displayed.
.
How to pair a device on "Settings" screen

12:00 Back
Day/Night Display
ACC03841AB
TSB Revision
MMES
3. Press "Bluetooth" button to display the "Bluetooth" screen.

Settings 12:00 Back
Audio Phone
ACC03240AC
4. Press "Pair Bluetooth Device" button.

Bluetooth 12:00 Back
5. Search a valid Bluetooth device by operating it. Select
Connect with Bluetooth ON "Car-Navi" on the search result, and then press "OK" button.
Pair Bluetooth Device NOTE: For how to operate a Bluetooth device, follow man-
Paired Device List ufacturer's instructions.
Edit Bluetooth Information 6. Follow instructions on the multivision display to press "YES"
button.
7. On completion, "XXXX (Bluetooth device description)
ACC03843AB
paired as 1 (Paring number)" will be displayed.
How to deactivate or activate the paring

12:00 Back
Day/Night Display
ACC03841AB
3. Press "Bluetooth" button to display the "Bluetooth" screen.

Settings 12:00 Back
Audio Phone
ACC03240AC
TSB Revision
MMES
4. Select "ON" or "OFF" on "Connect with Bluetooth" item to

Bluetooth 12:00 Back
deactivate/activate the paring.
Connect with Bluetooth ON
Pair Bluetooth Device
Paired Device List
Edit Bluetooth Information
ACC03843AC
HOW TO RESET MMES

M1546314200029
CAUTION
The MMES can be reset by the operations below.
How to reset
12:00 Back
Day/Night Display
ACC03841AB
3. Press "Others" button to display the appropriate screen.

Settings 12:00 Back
Audio Phone
ACC03240AB
TSB Revision
MMES
4. Press "Reset to Factory Setting" button to initialize the

Others 12:00 Back
MMES.
Unit Information
Check Connectivity
Reset to Factory Setting
ACC03241AC
5. On completion, power on the system. Then follow the

Reset to Factory Setting 12:00 Back
screen instructions to configure language and other initial
Delete All Data settings.
NOTE: When the MMES is reset, the displayed language
will be reset to English (default setting).
ACC03244
MAIN UNIT TERMINAL VOLTAGE

M1546303300152
Connector: C-07
Connector: C-08
ACC06770AB
.
CONNECTOR: C-07
Terminal Terminal Signal symbol Check condition Terminal
No. code voltage
1 RL- SPEAKER RL () When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
2 RL+ SPEAKER RL (+) When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
3 FL SPEAKER FL () When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
4 FL+ SPEAKER FL (+) When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
TSB Revision
MMES

No. code voltage
5 FR+ SPEAKER FR (+) When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
6 FR SPEAKER FR () When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
7 RR+ SPEAKER RR (+) When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
8 RR SPEAKER RR () When the sound is output 2.0 - 12.3
Vrms
9 +B BACK UP Always 10.8 - 15.6 V
10 REV PS-R  Ignition switch: ACC position 7 V or more
 Shift lever <M/T> or Selector
lever <CVT>: R position
11    
12 SPD VEHICLE SPEED When the vehicle is being driven 0 - 15.6 V
(Pulse signal)
13 ACC ACC Ignition switch: ACC position 9 V or more
14 SW1 Steering wheel remote control  
switch
15 ILL ILLUMI Lighting switch: TAIL 7 V or more
16 ILL+ ILLUMI Lighting switch: TAIL 7 V or more
17 AUTO Power supply (Radio antenna) When the radio station is 10.8 - 15.6 V
ANT received
18 GND GND Always 1V or less
.
CONNECTOR: C-08
No. code voltage
21 CAMERA- CCD CAMERA DETECT When the rear camera is 1 V or less
DET detected
22 CCD 6V REAR CAMERA (POWER) Ignition switch: ACC position 5.5 - 6.5 V
23 CCD-IN CCD CAMERA INPUT Always 1 Vp-p
24 CCD-GND CCD CAMERA GROUND Always 1 V or less
25 CCD GND REAR CAMERA GROUND Always 1 V or less
TSB Revision
MMES
MULTIVISION DISPLAY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

M1546301000166

 Removal of Instrument center panel (Refer to GROUP  Installation of Instrument center panel (Refer to GROUP
52A  Instrument Center Panel assembly P.52A-5) 52A  Instrument Center Panel assembly P.52A-5)
5
1.5 ± 0.5 N·m
13 ± 4 in-lb
1.5 ± 0.5 N·m

13 ± 4 in-lb
3.0 ± 1.0 N·m

27 ± 8 in-lb
1.5 ± 0.5 N·m

13 ± 4 in-lb
3.0 ± 1.0 N·m

27 ± 8 in-lb
3 1.5 ± 0.5 N·m

13 ± 4 in-lb
2
4
1
ACC03235AB
Removal Steps INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

1. Multivision .
display/Bracket/Navigation harness >>A<< MULTIVISION DISPLAY

2. Bracket (LH/RH)
3. Navigation harness
>>A<< 4. Multivision display
5. GPS antenna
Connector: C-07
Radio antenna
Connector: C-08
GPS antenna
USB connector
ACC06770AC
The connectors, antenna and cables connected to

the multivision display are shown in the figure.
TSB Revision
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
USB CABLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

M1549101300452
Refer to Radio and CD Player P.54A-163.

SPECIAL TOOLS
M1544000600759

name
a
Harness set
c adapter
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1544004800926
tents P.00-6.
M1544004902985

Procedure No. page
Steering wheel remote control switch (audio remote control switch) does not 1 P.54A-188
function.
Steering wheel remote control switch illumination does not come on. 2 P.54A-189
TSB Revision
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: Steering wheel remote control switch (audio remote control switch) does not
function.
CAUTION
Whenever the radio and CD player or multivision display is
replaced, ensure that the power supply circuit, the ground
.

The power supply circuit to the steering wheel remote control
switch (audio remote control switch), the steering wheel remote
control switch, the radio and CD player, the multivision display,
or the clock spring may be defective.
.
 The steering wheel remote control switch may be defective
 The clock spring may be defective
the connector
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check the steering wheel remote control switch.

Check the steering wheel remote control switch (Refer to
P.54A-191).
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the steering wheel remote control switch.
STEP 2. Check the clock spring.

Check whether the clock spring is in good condition. Refer to
GROUP 52B  Air bag module and clock spring P.52B-238.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Replace the clock spring.
TSB Revision

and open circuit in REM+, REM- line between radio and CD
player connector or multivision display connector and
steering wheel remote control switch connector
YES : Go to Step 4.

Check whether you can operate the radio and CD player or
multivision display by using the steering wheel remote control
switch.
NO : Replace the radio and CD player or multivision
display.
Inspection Procedure 2: Steering wheel remote control switch illumination does not come on.
CAUTION
Whenever the combination meter is replaced, ensure that
the power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the com-
munication circuit are normal.
.

The power supply circuit to the steering wheel remote control
switch, the steering wheel remote control switch, the combina-
tion meter, or the clock spring may be defective.
.
 The clock spring may be defective
the connector
DIAGNOSIS
TSB Revision
STEP 1. Check the steering wheel remote control switch.

Check the steering wheel remote control switch (Refer to
P.54A-191).
YES : Go to Step 2.
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at steering wheel remote

control switch connector (ground terminal)
harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the steering wheel remote
control switch connector (ground terminal) and ground.
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.

steering wheel remote control switch connector and the
ground
STEP 4. Check the clock spring.

Check whether the clock spring is in good condition. Refer to
GROUP 52B  Air bag module and clock spring P.52B-238.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Replace the clock spring.

and open circuit in ILL+ line between combination meter
connector and steering wheel remote control switch
connector
YES : Go to Step 6.
TSB Revision

Check whether the illumination of the steering wheel remote
control switch comes on normally.

M1544015600302
For the steering wheel remote control switch removal
and installation procedures, refer to GROUP 37 
Steering P.37-62.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCH CHECK
M1544015700406
"VOL UP"
Switch Position Tester Measurement
switch
Connection Value
"MODE" switch "MODE" switch 12 Approximately
pushed 270 
"CH DOWN" "CH UP" "CH UP" switch Approximately
switch switch
pushed 740 
"CH DOWN" switch Approximately
pushed 1.3 k
"VOL DOWN" "VOL UP" switch Approximately

switch pushed 2.1 k
"VOL DOWN" Approximately
ACB06026AB
ILLUMINATION CHECK
Apply the battery voltage to the connector terminal No. 3,
ground the terminal No. 4, and then check that the illumination
lights up.
TSB Revision
HANDS-FREE INTERFACE SYSTEM <VEHICLES WITH HANDS FREE-ECU>
HANDS-FREE INTERFACE SYSTEM <VEHICLES WITH

HANDS FREE-ECU>
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1544403500232

name
a
Harness set
c adapter
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
MMCS DIAGNOSIS
INTRODUCTION TO DIAGNOSIS
M1544404500387
NOTE: For detail of the hands free-ECU, you can see to access via the MITSUBISHI MOTORS web site.
Please read and agree the "Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies" because it connects
other than MITSUBISHI MOTORS web site. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/products/index.html
Prior to the troubleshooting, check if the causes below can be the case. If any, take actions according to the
solution method.
Pairing of the Bluetoothdevice (mobile phone or music player) and hands free-ECU cannot be made.
The hands free-ECU does not recognize the Bluetoothdevice (mobile phone or music player)
Cause Solution
The power of the With the power of the Bluetoothdevice turned on, check the trouble
Bluetoothdevice is off. symptom again.
In addition to the  With the voice operation, select the device to be connected.
Bluetoothdevice to be  Select the device to be connected on the radio and CD player.
recognized, two or more
Bluetoothdevice exist in
the vehicle.
TSB Revision
Cause Solution
Power supply abnormality in Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and check if iPod connected to
the hands free-ECU, or the USB connector or USB device can be played. If the hands free-ECU is
communication error defective, music cannot be played. Perform the Inspection procedure 2: The
between the radio and CD USB data cannot be replayed. (Refer to P.54A-196.) If the diagnosis mode of
player and hands free-ECU. hands free-ECU can be made an entry, the ECU status can be checked by
the hands free-ECU self-check, however, if the power supply of hands
free-ECU, or the communication with the radio and CD player may have a
problem, the ECU status can not be checked. (Refer to P.54A-194.)
Calling cannot be made using the hands free cellular phone function.
BluetoothThe music player cannot be replayed. 
The music data received from the USB connector cannot be replayed.
Cause Solution
The Bluetooth connection Connect the Bluetoothdevice to the hands free-ECU via Bluetooth.
is not made between the
hands free-ECU and
Bluetoothdevice.
The vehicle is not located in Check the radio wave condition of the mobile phone shown on the display, or
the communication area of check the radio wave condition shown on the mobile phone itself.
the cellular phone.
Communication error Check if the data of music file sent to the hands free-ECU can be replayed. If
between the hands there are no problems, the communication between the hands free-ECU and
free-ECU and the radio and the radio and CD player may have a problem.
CD player.
The voice recognition operation cannot be performed.

The communication voice cannot be heard by the other party.
Cause Solution
During the conversation, the During the conversation, press the speech switch and set to mute off by
microphone unit is set to voice recognition. Perform Inspection Procedure 3: When the speech switch
mute. is pressed, the voice guide is output, but the voice recognition is not
performed. (Refer to P.54A-196.)
The hands free-ECU cannot Minimize the noise by turning off the A/C, closing the window, and stopping
recognize the speech voice the engine, and then clearly speak up near the microphone unit.
because of noise or others.
The microphone unit , or the The microphone unit may have a problem. Perform Inspection Procedure 3:
connection has a problem. When the speech switch is pressed, the voice guide is output, but the voice
recognition is not performed. (Refer to P.54A-196.) The connection with the
microphone unit can be checked by the microphone check result on the
diagnosis mode. (Refer to P.54A-194.)
The speech switch, or the If the voice guide is not output when the speech switch is operated, the
connection has a problem. speech switch has a problem. Perform the Inspection Procedure 4: When the
speech switch is pressed, the voice guide is not output. (Refer to
P.54A-196.)
TSB Revision
A call cannot be received when the OFF HOOK switch is pressed.

The voice guide cannot be output from the speaker.
Cause Solution
The Bluetooth connection Connect the cellular phone to the hands free-ECU via Bluetooth.
is not made between the
hands free-ECU and cellular
phone.
The OFF HOOK switch, If the voice guide is not output when the speech switch is operated, the
speech switch, or the speech switch has a problem. Perform the Inspection Procedure 4: When the
connection has a problem. speech switch is pressed, the voice guide is not output. (Refer to P.54A-196.)
Voice guide "Unable to obtain vehicle speed. Please try again or contact your dealer for service" is
sent from the speaker.
Cause Solution
The hands free-ECU cannot If the vehicle speed signal the hands free-ECU receives has a problem, the
receive the vehicle speed vehicle speed signal of radio and CD player or the hands free-ECU may have
signal from the radio and CD a problem. Perform the Inspection Procedure 6: Voice guide "Unable to
player. obtain vehicle speed. Please try again or contact your dealer for service" is
sent from the speaker. (Refer to P.54A-196.)
STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC

TROUBLESHOOTING
M1540203800602
Refer to GROUP 00, How to use Troubleshooting/inspection
Service Points, Troubleshooting Contents P.00-6.
DIAGNOSIS MODE
M1544404800559
Enter the diagnosis mode according to the following steps:
1. Turn the Ignition switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position and
switch off the radio and CD player.
2. Press the following buttons in that order within sixty seconds
Fast-reverse/ from step (1).
Track down
Fast-forward/ (1) [CH1] button.
Return
Truck up (2) Fast-reverse/Track down button
Power/SEL
(3) Fast-forward/Track up button
(4) [CH4] button.
NOTE: .
 When the "Power" button of the radio and CD player is
pressed during the diagnosis mode, the diagnosis mode will
be cancelled, thus switching off the radio and CD player.
However, if the "Power" button is pressed while the hands
free-ECU is being updated, the update will not be cancelled.
 When an invalid button is pressed during diagnosis mode
except the hands free-ECU update, the diagnosis mode will
be cancelled, thus switching off the radio and CD player.
[CH1] [CH3] [CH4] [CH6]
 During the diagnosis mode, voice which is input through the
[CH2] [CH5]
microphone unit is played through a relevant loudspeaker.
3. "HFM DIAG" is displayed.
ACC06779AC
TSB Revision
Radio and CD player OFF
CH1
3 seconds
Fast-reverse/Track down
or
NG SEL
NO FILE
Fast-forward/Track up (Short press)
SEL
CH4
(Short
Return press) OK
UNLOCK HFM DIAG HFM UPDATE
3 seconds
3 seconds
CH4 CH3
Microphone check
result CODE_
SEL
(Short 3 seconds
CH4 CH3 press)
Part Number CODEXXXX
3 seconds Code NG
CH4 CH3
CODE WRONG
H/W Ver. Code OK

UPDATE XX%
ECU Abnormal
CH4 CH3
Malfunction End
S/W Ver. UPDATE

UPDATE FAIL COMPLETE
CH4 CH3 SEL SEL

(Short press) (Short press)
Self-check Result
ACC06288 AB
Description in the Actual display Condition

illustrations
UNLOCK UNLOCK Four-digit password, which has been set by the security
function, will be erased.
HFM DIAG HFM DIAG Displayed when the diagnosis mode is being entered.
Result of microphone MIC Short Displayed when the line between the microphone and the
check hands free-ECU is short-circuited.
MIC Open Displayed when the line between the microphone and the
hands free-ECU is open-circuited.
MIC OK Normal status (the line between the microphone and the
hands free-ECU is not open/short-circuited)
Part number PN XXXXXXXX Eight-digit part number is displayed.
H/W Ver. H/W XX Two-digit hardware version is displayed.
S/W Ver. S/W XXXXXXX Seven-digit software version is displayed.
TSB Revision
Description in the Actual display Condition

illustrations
Self-check result HFM OK Displayed when the hands free-ECU is not defective.
HFM Error Displayed when the hands free-ECU is suspected to be
defective.
NOTE: Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position once
when "ERROR" is displayed. Enter the diagnosis mode by
turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position again. If the
self-check result shows "ERROR" again, the hands free-ECU
is determined to be defective.
NO FILE NO file A USB device stores no data.
HFM UPDATE HFM Update Displayed when the hands free-ECU update file is found, at
the transition to the hands free-ECU update mode, in the USB
memory that is connected to the USB connector.
CODE_ CODE_ Input four-digit code for update. Use the "CH" button when a
code is input.
CODE XXXX Code XXXX XXXX after Code shows the numbers from 1 to 6,
corresponding to the buttons "CH1" to "CH6".
CODE WRONG Code wrong The code, which has been input, is wrong.
UPDATING XX% Updating XX% Displayed when updating is carried out.
UPDATING Update complete The updating mode is complete.
COMPLETE
UPDATE FAIL Update fail Displayed when the update of the hands free-ECU fails.

M1546001802190
NOTE: Some Bluetooth devices may not be com-
patible with the hands free-ECU
Procedure page
No.
Check the hands free-ECU power supply circuit. 1 P.54A-197
The USB data cannot be replayed. 2 P.54A-198
When the speech switch is pressed, the voice guide is output, but the voice 3 P.54A-200
recognition is not performed.
When the speech switch is pressed, the voice guide is not output. 4 P.54A-201
DIAGNOSIS MODE cannot be made an entry. Mobile Phone item is not 5 P.54A-202
displayed on the MENU screen of audio.
Voice guide "Unable to obtain vehicle speed. Please try again or contact your 6 P.54A-204
dealer for service" is sent from the speaker.
TSB Revision
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: Check the hands free-ECU power supply circuit.
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.

 The hands free-ECU is energized via the fusible link.
 The ACC signal is received through the radio and CD
player.
.
 The hands free-ECU may be defective
the connector
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Resistance measurement at hands free-ECU

connector (GND terminal).
(1) Disconnect hands free-ECU connector, and measure at the
(2) Check the continuity between GND terminal and ground.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Go to Step 2.
STEP 2. Check of open circuit in GND line between hands

free-ECU connector and ground.
TSB Revision
STEP 3. Voltage measurement at hands free-ECU

connector (+B terminal).
(2) Measure the voltage between +B terminal and ground.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Go to Step 4.

and open circuit in +B line between fusible link and hands
free-ECU connector.
STEP 5. Voltage measurement at hands free-ECU

connector (ACC terminal).
(2) Turn the ignition switch to "ACC" position.
(3) Measure the voltage between ACC terminal and ground.
YES : Replace the hands free-ECU.
NO : Go to Step 6.

and open circuit in ACC line between hands free-ECU
connector and radio and CD player connector.
YES : Replace the radio and CD player.
Inspection Procedure 2: The USB data cannot be replayed.
CAUTION
cuit are normal. Check that the USB memory device or
iPod is also normal.
.
TSB Revision

If the sound replay is impossible with the USB mode, the USB
cable, hands free-ECU, or radio and CD player may be defec-
tive, or a communication error between the radio and CD player
and hands free-ECU may have occurred.
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check that the music file (the
customer tried to replay) can be replayed.
.
 The USB cable may be defective
the connector
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check the radio and CD player operation.

Check if the radio and CD player normally and the sound is out-
put.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Troubleshoot the radio and CD player.
STEP 2. Check the diagnosis mode

Check if the hands free-ECU can be switched to the diagnosis
mode. (Refer to P.54A-194.)
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Perform Inspection Procedure 5 "DIAGNOSIS MODE
cannot be made an entry." (Refer to P.54A-202.)
STEP 3. Check the USB cable.

Check that the USB cable is connected to the hands free-ECU
normally. Or check the USB cable for damage such as bend.
YES : Go to Step 4.

and open circuit in AAL+, AAR+ line between hands
free-ECU connector and radio and CD player connector.
YES : Go to Step 5.
TSB Revision
STEP 5. Replace the hands free-ECU temporarily, and

check the trouble symptom.
Replace the hands free-ECU temporarily, and check that the
sound is output from the speaker.
Inspection Procedure 3: When the speech switch is pressed, the voice guide is output, but the voice
recognition is not performed.
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.

When the speech switch is pushed, if the voice guide is sent
but voice recognition is not executed, the microphone unit,
hands free-ECU or the communication between the micro-
phone unit and hands free-ECU may have a problem. It may
also be possible that the voice recognition is interfered by
external noise.
.
 The hands free-ECU may be defective.
 The microphone unit may be defective.
the connector
DIAGNOSIS

Close all the windows to suppress external noise as much as
possible. Then check whether the voice recognition operates
normally when you utter a word as close to the microphone unit
as possible
YES : Diagnosis complete.
NO : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision

Check if the microphone check result "HFM MIC Check" is dis-
played on the diagnosis mode of hands free-ECU. (Refer to
P.54A-194.)
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.

and open circuit in MIC+, MIC- line between hands
free-ECU connector and microphone unit connector.
STEP 4. Replace the microphone unit temporarily, and

YES : Replace the microphone unit.
NO : Go to Step 5.

NO : Go to Step 1.
Inspection Procedure 4: When the speech switch is pressed, the voice guide is not output.
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.

If the voice guide is not sent when the steering wheel remote
control switch (speech switch) is pushed, the communication
between the radio and CD player and the hands free-ECU, or
the communication between the radio and CD player and the
steering wheel remote control switch, the hands free-ECU or
the steering wheel remote control switch may have a problem.
.
TSB Revision

the connector
DIAGNOSIS

mode. (Refer to P.54A-194.)
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Perform Inspection Procedure 5 "DIAGNOSIS MODE
STEP 2. Operation check of the steering wheel remote

control switch (audio remote control switch)
Check that the radio and CD player can be operated by the
steering wheel remote control switch.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Troubleshoot the steering wheel remote control
switch.
STEP 3. Check the steering wheel remote control switch

(speech switch).
Check the continuity of the steering wheel remote control
switch. (Refer to P.54A-209.)
YES : Go to Step 4.
STEP 4. Temporarily replace the hands free-ECU, and

Inspection Procedure 5: DIAGNOSIS MODE cannot be made an entry. Mobile Phone item is not
displayed on the MENU screen of audio.
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.

If the diagnosis mode cannot be made an entry, the hands
free-ECU, the communication between the hands free-ECU
and the radio and CD player, or the power supply system of
hands free-ECU may have a problem.
TSB Revision
.
the connector
DIAGNOSIS

Check if the radio and CD player work normally and the sound
is output.
YES : Go to Step 2.

and open circuit in IE+, IE- line between hands free-ECU
connector and radio and CD player connector.
YES : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check if the power supply circuit of hands

free-ECU have a problem.
Perform the Inspection procedure 1 "Check the hands
free-ECU power supply circuit." of the troubleshooting. (Refer
to P.54A-197.)
YES : Go to Step 4.
NO : Repair according to the troubleshooting for reference.

TSB Revision
Inspection Procedure 6: Voice guide "Unable to obtain vehicle speed. Please try again or contact your
dealer for service" is sent from the speaker
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.

If the voice guide "Unable to obtain vehicle speed. Please try
again or contact your dealer for service" is sent from the
speaker, the vehicle speed signal of hands free-ECU has a
problem. At this time, the hands free-ECU, and the vehicle
speed signal of radio and CD player may have a problem.
.
the connector
DIAGNOSIS

Check if the speed compensated volume function of radio and
CD player works normally during driving.
YES : Go to Step 2.

mode.(Refer to P.54A-194.)
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Perform Inspection Procedure 5: "DIAGNOSIS MODE

TSB Revision
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
METHODS FOR PAIRING AND PAIRING DELETION WITH BLUETOOTH DEVICE

M1544405500658
NOTE: .  Some Bluetooth devices (mobile phone or
 For detail of the hands free-ECU, you can see to music player) may not be compatible with the
access via the MITSUBISHI MOTORS web site. hands free-ECU.
Please read and agree the "Warning about Links  A maximum of seven Bluetooth devices can be
to the Web Sites of Other Companies" because it registered.
connects other than MITSUBISHI MOTORS web  This system cannot be used when a battery of
site. Bluetooth devices was exhausted.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/index.html
PAIRING METHOD
.
1. Turn the ignition switch to "ACC" or "ON" position.

2. Press the "SPEECH" switch.
3. Say "Setup."
4. Say "Pairing options."
5. The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: pair,
"SPEECH" switch edit, delete, or list?"
6. Say "Pair."
7. The voice guide will say "Please say a 4-digit pairing code."
8. Say a 4 digit number. The 4 digit number will be registered
ACB05490AC as a pairing code for the device.
 When the confirmation function is on, the system will con-
firm whether the number said is acceptable. Answer "Yes"
to go Step 8. Say "No" to return to pairing code selection.
NOTE: .
 The pairing code entered here is only used for the Blue-
tooth connection certification. It is any 4-digit number
the user would like to select. A predetermined 4-digit
number may be assigned to some Bluetooth devices.
 Remember the pairing code as it needs to be keyed into
the device later in the pairing process.
 Depending on the connection settings of the Bluetooth
device, this code may have to be entered each time you
connect the Bluetooth device to the hands free-ECU.
For the default connection settings, refer to the instruc-
tions for device.
9. The voice guide will say "Start pairing procedure on device.
See device manual for instructions." Refer to the owner’s
manual for your device and enter into the device the pairing
code that was registered in Step 7.
10.When this system finds a Bluetooth device, the voice
guide will say "Please say the name of the device after the
beep."
11.After you hear the beep, name the device by saying a name
of your preference.
TSB Revision
NOTE: When the confirmation function is on, after repeating

the device tag you have said, the voice guide will ask "Is this
correct?" Answer "Yes".
To change the device tag, answer "No" and then say the
device tag again.
12.The voice guide will say "Pairing complete," after which a
beep will be played and the pairing process will end.
PAIRING DELETION METHOD

1. Turn the ignition switch to "ACC" or "ON" position.
2. Press the Speech switch.
3. Say "Setup."
4. Say "Pairing options"
5. The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: pair,
edit, delete, or list"
6. Say "Delete."
7. After the voice guide says "Please say," the numbers of the
devices and device tags of corresponding devices will be
read out in order, starting with the device that has been most
recently connected. After it completes reading all pairs, the
voice guide will say "or all."
Say the number of the device that you want to delete from
the system.
If you want to delete all paired devices from the system, say
"All."
8. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say "Deleting
(device tag) (number). Is this correct?" or "Deleting all
devices, Is this correct?"
9. Answer "Yes" to delete the devices.
Answer "No" the system will return to Step 5.
10.The voice guide will say "Deleted", and then the system will
end the device deletion process.
 If the device deletion process fails for some reason, the
voice guide will say "Delete failed." and then the system will
cancel deleting the device.
TSB Revision
HANDS FREE ECU

M1544405400383

 Removal of Radio and CD player (Refer to P.54A-163.)  Installation of Radio and CD player (Refer to P.54A-163.)
5.0 ± 1.0 N·m

44 ± 8 in-lb
5
4
3
2
ACE00994AB
Removal Steps Removal Steps

1. Cap 4. Hands free-ECU Bracket
2. Hands free-ECU/Hands 5. USB cable
free-ECU Bracket 6. Wiring tape
3. Hands free-ECU
TSB Revision
MICROPHONE UNIT

M1546023300335

.
MICROPHONE UNIT REMOVAL

Insert the special tool MB990784 from the shown direction to
remove the microphone unit.
Microphone
unit
A
Forward of vehicle
Section A - A
Microphone
unit Claw
Headlining
Retainer
MB990784
ACC06797AB

.
MICROPHONE UNIT INSTALLATION

The mark on the microphone unit should face towards the
Microphone
unit driver's side.
Mark
Forward of vehicle
ACC06798 AB
STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL SWITCH

M1546024200331
For the steering wheel remote control switch removal and
installation procedures, refer to GROUP 37  Steering P.37-62.
TSB Revision
SPEAKER
STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL SWITCH

CHECK
M1544401100476
Switch position Tester Measurement

connection Value
"SPEECH" switch 1  2 Approximately
pushed 4.6 k
"OFF HOOK" Approximately
"ON HOOK" Approximately
"SPEECH" "OFF HOOK" "ON HOOK"
switch switch switch
ACB05549AB
ILLUMINATION CHECK
Apply the battery voltage to the connector terminal No. 3,
ground the terminal No. 4, and then check that the illumination
lights up.
SPEAKER
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
SPEAKER TEST <VEHICLES WITH RADIO AND

CD PLAYER>
M1544005400943
SPEAKER CONNECTION CHECK MODE

.
Enter the speaker connection check mode according to the fol-

lowing steps:
1. Turn the Ignition switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position and
switch off the radio and CD player.
TSB Revision
SPEAKER
2. Press the following buttons in that order within sixty seconds

from step (1).
Fast-reverse/ Fast-forward/ (1) [CH1] button
Track down button Truck up button (2) Fast-reverse/Track down button
(3) Fast-forward/Track up button
(4) [CH6] button
[CH1] button [CH6] button
ACC06779AB
3. Check that the speaker, which is displayed on the center

panel display, sounds (If the [CH6] button is pressed, the
speaker will be changed).
<Display>
NOTE: .
<Front door  The display of "FL", "FR", "RL", "RR" blinks.
speaker (LH)>
 If no speakers sound, any of the speaker circuits is
short-circuited. Follow the troubleshooting "No sound is
<Front door heard".(Refer to Radio and CD Player - Troubleshooting
speaker (RH)>
P.54A-158.)
4. If a button other than the [CH6] button is pressed, or the
<Rear door ignition switch is turned to "LOCK" (OFF) position, you will
speaker (LH)>
exit from the speaker connection check mode.
<Rear door
speaker (RH)>
ACB03742 AB
BUZZ NOISE CHECK MODE

Inserting a CD (MR397836) during the speaker connection
check mode shifts the mode to the buzz noise check mode, and
the buzz noise sound of each speaker can be checked.
As with the speaker connection check mode, press the [CH6]
button to switch the output speaker of the buzz noise check
sound.
Check that the buzz noise sound is output from the output
speaker of buzz noise check sound.
NOTE: "SPKR" is displayed as "BUZZ" during buzz noise
check mode.
TSB Revision
SPEAKER

M1544100300476
ACB03717 AB
Removal Step Removal Step (Continued)

 Front door trim (Refer to GROUP  Speaker connector connection
52A  Door Trim P.52A-11). <<A>> 1. Door speaker
<Front door speaker>
 Rear door trim (Refer to GROUP
52A  Door Trim P.52A-11).
<Rear door speaker>

.
<<A>> REMOVAL OF DOOR SPEAKER

Disconnect the connector, and remove by twisting as shown in
the figure.
ACB03529
TSB Revision
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
M1544200201286
4.5 ± 1.0 N·m

40 ± 8 in-lb
ACD03899 AB
Removal steps Removal steps

1. Antenna rod  Radio and CD player or
 Headlining (Refer to multivision display (Refer to
GROUP 52A - Headlining P.54A-163 <Vehicles with
P.52A-15) radio and CD player> or
2. Antenna base P.54A-186 <Vehicles with
 Instrument panel cover multivision display>)
lower (Refer to GROUP 52A 3. Antenna feeder cable
 Instrument Lower Panel
P.52A-6)
TSB Revision
ETACS
ETACS
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1549000301842

name
a a. MB992744  DTC and service data check.
b. MB992745
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision
ETACS

name
a
b pushing V.C.I. DTC and service data check.
f. MB991825
ENTER key.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision
ETACS

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1545000900139
tents P.00-6.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
M1545001000311

(V.C.I.-Lite)
TSB Revision
ETACS
CAUTION
Data link connector
position.
MB992745, MB991910
MB992744, MB991824
MB992747, MB992748, MB991827 ACC02853 AB
color.

TROUBLE CODES
(V.C.I.-Lite)
display.
button.
TSB Revision
ETACS


(V.C.I.-Lite)
"OK" button.

To detect fault and store the DTC, the ETACS-ECU obtains
data before the confirmation of the DTC and data when the
DTC is confirmed, and then stores the current condition of the
ETACS-ECU. By analyzing each data from scan tool
(M.U.T.-III), the troubleshooting can be performed more effi-
ciently. Display items of the freeze frame data are as follows.
.
TSB Revision
ETACS
Display item list

1 Odometer Total driving distance after the DTC is km
generated
2 Ignition cycle Number of times the ignition switch is turned Number of
"ON" or "LOCK (OFF)" after the past failure counts is
transition. displayed.
3 Elapsed time Total elapsed time after a DTC is generated min*
DTC
NOTE: *: Total elapsed time can be stored up to
65534 minutes. The display of scan tool (M.U.T.-III)
is fixed to 65534 minutes after 65534 minutes have
elapsed. Or, if the battery is disconnected, the total
elapsed time cannot be measured properly. Thus,
65535 minutes (null value) is displayed. Since the
value is calculated according to the information from
the ETACS-ECU, a proper value may not be dis-
played when the ETACS-ECU time-out has occurred.
M1545001101474
CAUTION
During troubleshooting, a DTC associated with other systems may be stored when the ignition switch
is turned ON with connector(s) disconnected. On the completion of troubleshooting, confirm all sys-
tems for DTC(s). If DTC(s) are stored, erase them all.

B1702 Transponder read error Refer to P.54A-277.
B1703 Transponder ID unmatched
B1722 Immobilizer-antenna fail
B1731 PCM authentification timeout
B1766 Already learned by other vehicle
B1A28 PCM authentification error
B1706 *2 Flasher fuse blown Refer to P.54A-67.
B1707*2 Flasher open

B1709 ETACS ECU (EEPROM) P.54A-219
B1760*1, 2 Coding not completed P.54A-219
B1761*1 VIN not programmed P.54A-220
B1762*2 IOD fuse not seated fully P.54A-221
B1765*2 ECU fuse
B1763 Lighting switch Refer to P.54A-151.
B1764 Wiper switch
B2206 VIN error/Mismatch P.54A-222
TSB Revision
ETACS

U1000 CAN OSS CAN timeout P.54A-223
U1100 communi Engine CAN timeout P.54A-224
cation
U1101 T/M CAN timeout/Not equipped P.54A-226
U1102 ASC/TCL/ABS timeout/Not equipped P.54A-227
U1108 Meter CAN timeout/Not equipped P.54A-228
U1110 A/C CAN timeout/Not equipped P.54A-229
U1116 F.A.S.T. CAN timeout/No equipped P.54A-231
U1150 *2 Fail Info. for vehicle speed P.54A-232
U1500 LIN Column ECU LIN timeout/Not equip Refer to GROUP 54B  DTC
U1507 communi LIN transmission bit error Chart P.54B-6.
cation
U1530 Column ECU LIN checksum error
U1570 No bus activity error for LIN
NOTE: .  *2: Does not detect historic trouble.
 *1: If DTCs No. B1760 or B1761 is stored, there
may be an error with the coding data stored in the
ETACS-ECU.
DTC B1709: ETACS ECU (EEPROM)

. .

If at least one error occurs while the ETACS-ECU The ETACS-ECU may be defective.
sends data to and receives from the EEPROM, the
ETACS-ECU stores DTC No. B1709.
DTC B1760: Coding not completed

. .

The ETACS-ECU stores DTC No. B1760 when the The ETACS-ECU may be defective.
coding is not carried out.
TSB Revision
ETACS
DTC B1761: VIN not programmed
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
If the VIN data is not written when the ETACS-ECU is replaced,
the ETACS-ECU stores DTC No.B1761.
.
 VIN not written
DIAGNOSIS

line.
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 2.
Diagnosis P.54C-12).
STEP 2. Write the VIN.

(1) Write the VIN data to the ETACS-ECU.
(2) Erase the DTC.
(3) Turn the ignition switch from the LOCK (OFF) position to the
ON position.
Q: Is DTC No.B1761 set?
TSB Revision
ETACS
DTC B1762: IOD fuse not seated fully

DTC B1765: ECU fuse
CAUTION  When voltage at the ECU fuse (fuse No. 26)

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the drops below 5 V with the ignition switch ON and
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the ACC ON signal is detected for 500 milliseconds,
communication circuit are normal. the ETACS-ECU sets DTC No. B1765.
.
.

 When voltage at the power supply fuses (fuse  The fuse may be defective
Nos. 25 and 26) drops below 5 V with the ignition  The ETACS-ECU may be defective
switch ON and ACC OFF signal is detected for  The KOS&OSS-ECU may be defective <Vehicles
500 milliseconds, the ETACS-ECU sets DTC No. with KOS>
B1762.  The wiring harness or connectors may have
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check the power supply fuses (fuse Nos. 25 and

26)
Junction block Check the power supply fuses (fuse Nos. 25 and 26). (Refer to
GROUP 00  How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service
Points  Inspection Service Points for a Blown Fuse P.00-15.)
Fuse No.25
Q: Is the fuse in good condition?
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Then go to Step 5.
Fuse No.26
AC706261AB
AC706261

and open circuit in ETACS +B line between fusible link and
ETACS-ECU connector
YES <vehicles without KOS> : Go to Step 3.
YES <vehicles with KOS> : Go to Step 4.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. Then go to
Step 5.
TSB Revision
ETACS

CAUTION
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Diagnose the KOS&OSS-ECU. Refer to GROUP
42B, Troubleshooting P.42B-13.
NO : Go to Step 4.

and open circuit in ACCI line between ignition switch
(ACC) <vehicles without KOS> or ACC relay connector
<vehicles with KOS> and ETACS-ECU connector
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. Then go to
Step 5.

Check again if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Erase the DTC.
position.
Q: Is the DTC set?
NO : If the trouble symptom is resolved, an intermittent
malfunction such as poorly engaged connector(s) or
wiring harness is suspected. (Refer to GROUP 00 
How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service
Points  How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
P.00-13.)
DTC B2206: VIN error/Mismatch

 If DTC No.B2206 is stored in the ETACS-ECU, If the VIN registered to ETACS-ECU and the VIN on
diagnose the CAN main bus line. CAN bus lines do not match, the ETACS-ECU stores
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that DTC No. B2206.
the power supply circuit, the ground circuit .
and the communication circuit are normal. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

.
 The engine control module may be defective.
TSB Revision
ETACS
 The ETACS-ECU, which was used on another STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the
vehicle, is installed on this vehicle. engine control module diagnostic trouble code
 The ETACS-ECU improperly coding or incorrect Check if a VIN-related DTC is stored in the engine
VIN. control module.
DIAGNOSIS Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Troubleshoot the MFI (Refer to GROUP
13A, Troubleshooting P.13A-47).
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the NO : Go to Step 3.
CAN bus line.
CAUTION STEP 3. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Replace the ETACS-ECU with a properly coded one.
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Then check if a DTC is stored again.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- (1) Replace the ETACS-ECU with a properly coded
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). one.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to (2) Erase the DTC.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215." (3) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. position to "ON" position.
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. (4) Check if DTC is stored.
position. Q: Is the DTC stored?
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? NO : The diagnosis is complete.
YES : Go to Step 2.
54C  Troubleshooting P.54C-12). On
completion, go to Step 3.
DTC U1000: OSS CAN timeout
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
 If DTC No.U1000 is set in the ETACS-ECU,
diagnose the CAN main bus line. STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that CAN bus line
the power supply circuit, the ground circuit
CAUTION
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
If signal from the KOS&OSS-ECU cannot be (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
received for 500 milliseconds or more, the ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
ETACS-ECU sets DTC No. U1000. (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
.

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
 The CAN bus line may be defective. (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective. position.
YES : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the KOS STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
diagnostic trouble code Check again if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU.
Check that the KOS&OSS-ECU sets a DTC. (1) Erase the DTC.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Diagnose the KOS&OSS-ECU. Refer to position to "ON" position.
GROUP 42B, Troubleshooting P.42B-13. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set
NO : Go to Step 3. again.
Q: Is the DTC set?
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing
combination meter diagnostic trouble code the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
Check if DTC No. U1000 is set in the combination diagnostics. Then go to Step 6.
meter.
Q: Is the DTC set? CAN bus lines between the
YES : Go to Step 4. KOS&OSS-ECU and the ETACS-ECU
NO : Go to Step 5. (Refer to GROUP 00, How to Use
STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code. How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions
Check again if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU. P.00-13).
(1) Erase the DTC.
(2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF) STEP 6. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
position to "ON" position. Recheck if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU.
(3) On completion, check whether the DTC is set (1) Erase the DTC.
again. (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
Q: Is the DTC set? position to "ON" position.
YES : Replace the KOS&OSS-ECU. After (3) On completion, check whether the DTC is set
replacing the ECU, carry out the CAN bus again.
diagnostics. Then go to Step 6.
Q: Is the DTC set?
intermittent malfunction is present in the NO : The procedure is complete.
KOS&OSS-ECU and the ETACS-ECU
(Refer to GROUP 00, How to Use
How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions
P.00-13).
DTC U1100: Engine CAN timeout
CAUTION TROUBLE JUDGMENT

 If DTC No.U1100 is stored in the ETACS-ECU, If signal from the engine control module cannot be
diagnose the CAN main bus line. received for 500 milliseconds or more, the
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that ETACS-ECU stores DTC No. U1100.

.

TSB Revision
ETACS

Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
CAN bus line. (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
CAUTION
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Q: Is the DTC stored?
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- YES : Replace the engine control module. After
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). replacing the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to diagnostics. Then go to Step 6.
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. CAN bus lines between the engine control
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) module and the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
position. GROUP 00, How to Use
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions
YES : Go to Step 2.
P.00-13).
completion, go to Step 6. STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
(1) Erase the DTC.
engine control module diagnostic trouble code
Check that the engine control module set a DTC.
YES : Diagnose the engine control module. Refer Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing
to GROUP 13A, Troubleshooting P.13A-47.
NO : Go to Step 3. the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the intermittent malfunction is present in the
combination meter diagnostic trouble code CAN bus lines between the engine control
Check if DTC No. U0100 is stored in the combination module and the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
meter. GROUP 00, How to Use
Q: Is the DTC stored? Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
YES : Go to Step 4. How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions
NO : Go to Step 5. P.00-13).

Recheck if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Erase the DTC.
TSB Revision
ETACS
DTC U1101: T/M CAN timeout/Not equipped

 If DTC No.U1101 is stored in the ETACS-ECU, combination meter diagnostic trouble code
diagnose the CAN main bus line. Check if DTC No. U0101 is stored in the combination
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that meter.
the power supply circuit, the ground circuit Q: Is the DTC stored?
and the communication circuit are normal. YES : Go to Step 4.
.
NO : Go to Step 5.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
If signal from the TCM cannot be received for 500
milliseconds or more, the ETACS-ECU stores DTC STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
No. U1101. Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Erase the DTC.
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
 The TCM may be defective. Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Replace the TCM. After replacing the ECU,
DIAGNOSIS carry out the CAN bus diagnostics. Then go
to Step 6.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the intermittent malfunction is present in the
CAN bus line CAN bus lines between the TCM and the
CAUTION ETACS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 00, How to
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Malfunctions P.00-13).
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215." Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. (1) Erase the DTC.
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) position to "ON" position.
position. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? Q: Is the DTC stored?
YES : Go to Step 2. YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
54C  Troubleshooting P.54C-12). On diagnostics. Then go to Step 6.
completion, go to Step 6. NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the CVT CAN bus lines between the TCM and the
diagnostic trouble code ETACS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 00, How to
Check that the TCM set a DTC. Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service
Malfunctions P.00-13).
YES : Diagnose the TCM. Refer to GROUP 23A,
Troubleshooting P.23A-16.
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
ETACS

(1) Erase the DTC.
DTC U1102: ASC/TCL/ABS timeout/Not equipped
CAUTION STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the ASC

 If DTC No.U1102 is stored in the ETACS-ECU, diagnostic trouble code
diagnose the CAN main bus line. Check that the ASC-ECU set a DTC.
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that Q: Is the DTC stored?
the power supply circuit, the ground circuit YES : Diagnose the ASC-ECU. Refer to GROUP
and the communication circuit are normal. 35C, Troubleshooting P.35C-16.
.
NO : Go to Step 3.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
If signal from the ASC-ECU cannot be received for
500 milliseconds or more, the ETACS-ECU stores STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the SRS
DTC No. U1102. diagnostic trouble code
Check if DTC No. U1102 is stored in SRS-ECU.
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Q: Is the DTC stored?

 The CAN bus line may be defective. YES : Go to Step 4.
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective. NO : Go to Step 5.
 The ASC-ECU may be defective.
DIAGNOSIS Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Erase the DTC.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
CAN bus line position to "ON" position.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), Q: Is the DTC stored?
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" YES : Replace the ASC-ECU. After replacing the
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- ECU, carry out the CAN bus diagnostics.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Then go to Step 6.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215." intermittent malfunction is present in the
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. CAN bus lines between the ASC-ECU and
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. the ETACS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 00, How
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service
position. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
YES : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision
ETACS
Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU. Recheck if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
(2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF) (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
position to "ON" position. position to "ON" position.
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing YES : Return to Step 1.
the ECU, carry out the CAN bus NO : The procedure is complete.
CAN bus lines between the ASC-ECU and
the ETACS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 00, How
to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service
DTC U1108: Meter CAN timeout/Not equipped
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
 If DTC No.U1108 is stored in the ETACS-ECU,
diagnose the CAN main bus line. STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that CAN bus line.
the power supply circuit, the ground circuit
CAUTION
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
If signal from the combination meter cannot be (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
received for 500 milliseconds or more, the ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
ETACS-ECU stores DTC No. U1108. (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
.

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (3) Diagnose the CAN bus line.
 The CAN bus line may be defective. (4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective. position.
YES : Go to Step 2.

Check that the combination meter set a DTC.
YES : Diagnose the combination meter. Refer to
P.54A-18.
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the SRS STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
diagnostic trouble code Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
Check if DTC No. U1108 is stored in SRS-ECU. (1) Erase the DTC.
YES : Go to Step 4. position to "ON" position.
NO : Go to Step 5. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset.
STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code. YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing
Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU. the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
(1) Erase the DTC. diagnostics. Then go to Step 6.
position to "ON" position. intermittent malfunction is present in the
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset. CAN bus lines between the combination
meter and the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
Q: Is the DTC stored? GROUP 00, How to Use
YES : Replace the combination meter. After Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
replacing the ECU, carry out the CAN bus How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions
diagnostics. Then go to Step 6. P.00-13).
CAN bus lines between the combination STEP 6. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
meter and the ETACS-ECU (Refer to Recheck if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
GROUP 00, How to Use (1) Erase the DTC.
Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points  (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions position to "ON" position.
P.00-13). (3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
DTC U1110: A/C CAN timeout/Not equipped
CAUTION TROUBLE JUDGMENT

 If DTC No.U1110 is stored in the ETACS-ECU, If signal from the A/C-ECU cannot be received for
diagnose the CAN main bus line. 500 milliseconds or more, the ETACS-ECU stores
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that DTC No. U1110.

.

 The A/C-ECU may be defective.
TSB Revision
ETACS

CAN bus line (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
CAUTION
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Q: Is the DTC stored?
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- YES : Replace the A/C-ECU. After replacing the
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). ECU, carry out the CAN bus diagnostics.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to Then go to Step 4.
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. CAN bus lines between the A/C-ECU and
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) the ETACS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 00, How
position. to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? Malfunctions P.00-13).
YES : Go to Step 2.
54C  Troubleshooting P.54C-12). On STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
completion, go to Step 5. Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Erase the DTC.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the A/C
Check that the A/C-ECU set a DTC.
Q: Is the DTC stored? YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing
YES : Diagnose the A/C-ECU. Refer to GROUP
the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
55B, Troubleshooting P.55B-8.
NO : Go to Step 3.
CAN bus lines between the A/C-ECU and
the ETACS-ECU (Refer to GROUP 00, How
to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service

(1) Erase the DTC.
TSB Revision
ETACS
DTC U1116: F.A.S.T. CAN timeout/No equipped

 If DTC No.U1116 is set in the ETACS-ECU, combination meter diagnostic trouble code
diagnose the CAN main bus line. Check if DTC No. U0168 is set in the combination
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that meter.
the power supply circuit, the ground circuit Q: Is the DTC set?
and the communication circuit are normal. YES : Go to Step 4.
.
NO : Go to Step 5.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
If signal from the KOS&OSS-ECU cannot be
received for 500 milliseconds or more, the STEP 4. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
ETACS-ECU sets DTC No. U1116. Check again if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Erase the DTC.
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
(3) On completion, check whether the DTC is set
again.
Q: Is the DTC set?
DIAGNOSIS YES : Replace the KOS&OSS-ECU. After
replacing the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
CAN bus line. intermittent malfunction is present in the
CAUTION CAN bus lines between the
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), KOS&OSS-ECU and the ETACS-ECU
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (Refer to GROUP 00, How to Use
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to P.00-13).
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. STEP 5. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. Check again if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) (1) Erase the DTC.
position. (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
Q: Is the CAN bus line found to be normal? position to "ON" position.
YES : Go to Step 2. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is not set
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP again.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing
the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the KOS diagnostics. Then go to Step 6.
diagnostic trouble code NO : A poor connection, open circuit or other
Check that the KOS&OSS-ECU sets a DTC. intermittent malfunction is present in the
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Diagnose the KOS&OSS-ECU. Refer to KOS&OSS-ECU and the ETACS-ECU
GROUP 42B, Troubleshooting P.42B-13. (Refer to GROUP 00, How to Use
NO : Go to Step 3. Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
P.00-13).
TSB Revision
ETACS

Recheck if the DTC is set in the ETACS-ECU.
(1) Erase the DTC.
(3) On completion, check whether the DTC is set
again.
Q: Is the DTC set?
DTC U1150: Fail Info. for vehicle speed

.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the

If the ETACS-ECU receives a vehicle speed sensor engine control module diagnostic trouble code
failure signal from engine control module, the ECU Check that the engine control module set a DTC.
stores DTC No. U1150. Q: Is the DTC stored?
.
YES : Diagnose the engine control module. Refer
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS to GROUP 13A  Troubleshooting
 The CAN bus line may be defective. P.13A-47.
 The vehicle speed sensor may be defective. NO : Go to Step 3.
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective. STEP 3. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.
DIAGNOSIS (1) Erase the DTC.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the position to "ON" position.
CAN bus line (3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
CAUTION Q: Is the DTC stored?

To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), YES : Replace the engine control module. After
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" replacing the ECU, carry out the CAN bus
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- diagnostics. Then go to Step 4.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to intermittent malfunction is present in the
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215." CAN bus lines between the engine control
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. module and the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
(3) Diagnose the CAN bus line. GROUP 00, How to Use
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
position. How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunctions
P.00-13).
YES : Go to Step 2.
TSB Revision
ETACS
Check again if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU. Recheck if the DTC is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
(2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF) (2) Turn the ignition switch from "LOCK" (OFF)
position to "ON" position. position to "ON" position.
(3) On completion, check that the DTC is not reset. (3) On completion, check that the DTC is reset.
YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After replacing YES : Return to Step 1.
the ECU, carry out the CAN bus NO : The procedure is complete.
CAN bus lines between the engine control
module and the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
GROUP 00, How to Use
P.00-13).
SERVICE DATA INSPECTION PROCEDURE
M1545001300679
1. Use the scan tool (M.U.T.-III) to check "Data List." 2. The following input signals can be checked by
using the scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
SERVICE DATA REFERENCE TABLE
.
Item No. Check item Display on Check condition Normal condition

scan tool
19 Driver's door Driver's door Driver's door switch ON (The driver’s door is ON
switch switch open.)
Driver's door switch OFF (The driver's door OFF
is closed.)
20 Driver's door Driver's door Driver's door: Unlocked ON
unlock switch unlock switch Driver's door: Locked OFF
21 Driver’s door Driver's door Driver's door: Locked ON
lock switch lock switch Driver's door: Unlocked OFF
22*  Electric folding  OFF
door mirror
SW
25 Windshield Front wiper When windshield wipers are operating ON
wiper auto auto stop When windshield wipers are off OFF
stop switch switch
26 Hazard Hazard Hazard warning light switch: ON (when the ON
warning light warning light switch is operated)
switch switch Hazard warning light switch: OFF (when the OFF
switch is not operated)
27 Rear wiper Rear wiper When the rear wiper is operating ON
auto-stop auto stop When the rear wiper is not working OFF
switch switch
TSB Revision
ETACS

scan tool
28 Key reminder Steering lock Key reminder switch: ON (with the ignition ON
switch switch key removed from the ignition key hole)
Key reminder switch: OFF (with the ignition OFF
key inserted into the ignition key hole)
29 Ignition switch Ignition Ignition switch: ACC or ON ON
(ACC) switch(ACC) Ignition switch: LOCK (OFF) or START OFF
30 Ignition switch Ignition Ignition switch: ON or START ON
(ON) switch(IG1) Ignition switch: LOCK (OFF) or ACC OFF
44 Ignition switch Ignition Ignition switch: ON ON
(IG2) switch(IG2) Ignition switch: LOCK (OFF), ACC or OFF
START
48 Passenger's Passenger's Front passenger's door: open ON
door switch door switch Front passenger's door: closed OFF
49 Rear door Rear door Rear door (right or left) or liftgate: open ON
switch or switch Rear door (right or left) or liftgate: closed OFF
liftgate latch
switch
55 Battery Battery  Voltage (V) is
voltage voltage displayed.
56 Headlight Remain of Headlight automatic shutdown function is on Time (second) of
automatic headlight timer the headlight
shutdown automatic
timer period shutdown timer is
displayed.
59 Taillight output Taillight output Column switch (lighting switch): TAIL ON
Column switch (lighting switch): Other than OFF
TAIL
60 Output to Headlight Column switch (lighting switch): HEAD ON
low-beam output Column switch (lighting switch): Other than OFF
headlights HEAD
61 Output to Headlight HI Column switch (dimmer/passing): ON ON
high-beam output Column switch (dimmer/passing): OFF OFF
headlights
62 Output to left Turn-signal Column switch (left turn-signal light): ON ON
turn-signal light (LH) Column switch (left turn-signal light): OFF OFF
light output
63 Output to right Turn-signal Column switch (right turn-signal light): ON ON
turn-signal light (RH) Column switch (right turn-signal light): OFF OFF
light output
64*  Headlight  OFF
washer output
65 Low speed Front wiper Column switch (windshield wipers): LO ON
output to output Column switch (windshield wipers): Other OFF
windshield than LO
wipers
TSB Revision
ETACS

scan tool
66 High speed Front wiper HI Column switch (windshield wipers): HI ON
output to output Column switch (windshield wipers): Other OFF
windshield than HI
wipers
67 Output to Front washer Column switch (windshield washers): ON ON
windshield output Column switch (windshield washers): OFF OFF
washer
68 Door lock Door "LOCK" Door lock switch: ON ON
output output Door lock switch: OFF OFF
69 Door unlock Door Door lock switch: OFF ON
output "UNLOCK" Door lock switch: ON OFF
output
70 Output to front Front fog light Turn on the fog light switch when the ON
fog lights headlights are on.
When front fog lights are off OFF
71*  Rear fog light  OFF
72 Output to Dome light Dome light: ON ON
dome light output Dome light: OFF OFF
73 Output to horn Horn Panic alarm system: ON ON
Panic alarm system: OFF OFF
76 Power supply Illuminations Column switch (lighting switch): TAIL ON
to the power supply Column switch (lighting switch): Other than OFF
illumination TAIL
77 Output to the Power window Ignition switch: ON ON
power window relay output Ignition switch: OFF OFF
relay
80*  All of the door  OFF
switch output
81 Output of Shift position Shift lever <M/T> or selector lever <CVT>: P ON
selector lever "P" output position
(P) position Shift lever <M/T> or selector lever <CVT>: OFF
Other than P position
83 Rear washer Rear washer Column switch (rear washer): ON ON
output output Column switch (rear washer): OFF OFF
84 Output to rear Rear wiper Column switch (rear wiper): ON ON
wiper output Column switch (rear wiper): OFF OFF
TSB Revision
ETACS

scan tool
86 Windshield Intermittent  Intermittent wiper
intermittent wiper interval interval of the
wiper interval windshield wipers
is displayed in
seconds. This
value depends on
position of the
variable
intermittent wiper
control switch and
vehicle speed.
88*  ELC.folding  OFF
mirror(OPEN)
output
89*  ELC.folding  OFF
mirror(CLOSE
)output
91*  Hood switch  OFF
103 Rear window Rear defogger Rear window defogger switch: ON ON
defogger switch Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
switch
104  Auto light  
sensor voltage
105*  Security  OFF
indicator
output
106 Output to rear Rear defogger When rear window defogger is operated ON
window output When rear window defogger is not operated OFF
defogger
107*  DRL output  OFF
108 Stoplight Stoplight Brake pedal: depressed ON
switch switch Brake pedal: released OFF
109 Output to shift Shift Lock When all the following conditions are met. ON
lock signal output  Ignition switch: ON
 Selector lever: P position
 Brake pedal: depressed
Other than above OFF
110  ACC output  OFF
NOTE: *: Is displayed as OFF because the item is
not used.
TSB Revision
ETACS
CHECK CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS

M1549000803144

procedure page
number
Check the battery power supply circuit to the ETACS-ECU. A-1 P.54A-237
Tone alarm Light reminder tone alarm does not work normally. B-1 P.54A-238
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure A-1: Check the battery power supply circuit to the ETACS-ECU.
.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The ETACS-ECU may be defective
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  The wiring harness or connectors may have
communication circuit are normal. loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) nals pushed back in the connector

If the ETACS-ECU functions do not work at all, the
ETACS-ECU power supply system, ground system,
or ETACS-ECU may have a problem.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Resistance measurement at ETACS-ECU

connector (EARTH, SGND terminal)
harness side.
(2) Measure the resistance between the ETACS-ECU
connector (EARTH terminal) and ground.
(3) Measure the resistance between the ETACS-ECU
connector (SGND terminal) and ground.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Go to Step 2.
STEP 2. Check of open circuit in EARTH, SGND line

between ETACS-ECU connector and ground
YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer to
GROUP 00  How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection
Service Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 3. Voltage measurement at ETACS-ECU connector

(ETACS +B terminal)
harness side.
(2) Check the voltage between the ETACS-ECU connector
(ETACS +B terminal) and ground.
YES : Go to Step 5.
NO : Go to Step 4.

and open circuit in ETACS +B line between fusible link and
ETACS-ECU connector

Check that the ETACS-ECU functions work normally.
Q: Is the check result satisfactory?
Cope with Intermittent Malfunction P.00-13)
Inspection procedure B-1: Light reminder tone alarm does not work normally.
CAUTION  Headlight switch

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the If the tone alarm does not sound properly, the input
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the signal(s) are abnormal or the combination meter or
communication circuit are normal. the ETACS-ECU may be defective.
.
.

The ETACS-ECU uses the input signals below to  The driver's door switch may be defective
send a light reminder tone alarm request signal to  The column switch may be defective
the combination meter.  The combination meter may be defective
 Ignition switch (IG1)  The ETACS-ECU may be defective
 Driver's door switch
 Taillight switch
TSB Revision
ETACS
DIAGNOSIS STEP 3. Check by scan tool (M.U.T.-III) "Special

Function"
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), select "Test" from the
diagnostic trouble code. special function of the combination meter. Execute
the following item to check the tone alarm.
CAUTION
 Item 3: Buzzer(AUTO)
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Q: Is the check result normal?
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- YES : Go to Step 4.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). NO : Replace the combination meter.
connect the scan tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215." STEP 4. Retest the system.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Check that the light reminder tone alarm works nor-
(3) Check whether the ETACS-ECU related DTC is mally.
stored.
position.
Q: Is the DTC stored? use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
YES : Refer to DTC chart P.54A-218. Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
NO : Go to Step 2. Malfunction P.00-13).
list
Check the input signals below, which are related to
the light reminder tone alarm function.
 Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF)
position.
 Open the driver’s door.
 Column switch (lighting switch): TAIL or HEAD
No.
30 Ignition switch(IG1) OFF
60 Headlight output Any of items is ON
59 Taillight output
OK: Normal conditions are displayed for all

the items.
YES : Go to Step 3.
CHECK TROUBLE BY USING THE INPUT SIGNAL CHECK
M1545004900614

procedure page
number
The ignition switch (ACC) signal is not received. 1 P.54A-240
The ignition switch (IG1) signal is not received. 2 P.54A-241
TSB Revision
ETACS

procedure page
number
The key reminder switch signal is not received. 3 P.54A-242
The front door lock actuator (driver’s side) signal is not received. 4 P.54A-243
The front door switch (driver’s side) signal is not received. 5 P.54A-244
The front door switch (passenger’s side) signal is not received. 6 P.54A-245
One of the door switch signals (including the liftgate latch switch) is not 7 P.54A-246
received.
The hazard warning light switch signal is not received. 8 P.54A-248
The column switch signal is not received. 9 P.54A-249
The stoplight switch signal is not received. 10 P.54A-250
The rear window defogger switch signal is not received. <vehicles with manual 11 P.54A-251
air conditioning>
The rear window defogger switch signal is not received. <vehicles with 12 P.54A-252
automatic air conditioning>
INPUT SIGNAL PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: The ignition switch (ACC) signal is not received.
CAUTION STEP 1. Voltage measurement at ETACS-ECU

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the connector (ACCI terminal)
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
communication circuit are normal. wiring harness side.
.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) (3) Check the voltage between the ETACS-ECU
If the input signal from the ignition switch (ACC) is connector (ACCI terminal) and ground.
defective, the signal is not sent to the communication
lines.
.

YES : Go to Step 5.
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective NO <vehicles without KOS> : Go to Step 2.
 The KOS&OSS-ECU may be defective <Vehicles NO <vehicles with KOS> : Go to Step 3.
with KOS>
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- STEP 2. Check of short to power supply, short to
nals pushed back in the connector ground, and open circuit in ACCI line between
ignition switch (ACC) and ETACS-ECU connector
YES : Refer to Inspection Procedure "Malfunction
of the ignition switch power supply system."
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe P.54A-9
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the KOS STEP 5. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
diagnostic trouble code list.
CAUTION Check the input signals from the ignition switch
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), (ACC).
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"  Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- Item Item name Normal condition
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). No.
connect the Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215." 29 Ignition switch (ACC) ON
(3) Check that the KOS&OSS-ECU sets a DTC. OK: Normal condition is displayed.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Diagnose the KOS&OSS-ECU. Refer to
GROUP 42B, Troubleshooting P.42B-13. malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
NO : Go to Step 4. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to NO : Replace the ETACS-ECU.
ground, and open circuit in ACCI line between
ACC relay connector and ETACS-ECU connector
Inspection Procedure 2: The ignition switch (IG1) signal is not received.
CAUTION DIAGNOSIS
Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the Required Special Tools:
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  MB991223: Harness Set
communication circuit are normal.  MB992006: Extra Fine Probe
.

If the input signal from the ignition switch (IG1) is STEP 1. Voltage measurement at ETACS-ECU
defective, the signal is not sent to the communication connector (IG1 terminal)
lines. (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS (2) Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective (3) Check the voltage between the ETACS-ECU
 The KOS&OSS-ECU may be defective <Vehicles connector (IG1 terminal) and ground.
with KOS> OK: The voltage should measure approxi-
 The wiring harness or connectors may have mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage).
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- Q: Is the check result normal?
nals pushed back in the connector YES : Go to Step 5.
NO <vehicles without KOS> : Go to Step 2.
NO <vehicles with KOS> : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 2. Check of short to power supply, short to STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to
ground, and open circuit in IG1 line between ground, and open circuit in IG1 line between IG1
ignition switch (IG1) and ETACS-ECU connector relay connector and ETACS-ECU connector
YES : Refer to Inspection Procedure "Malfunction YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
of the ignition switch power supply system." malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
P.54A-9 use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
CAUTION STEP 5. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
list.
Check the input signal from the ignition switch (IG1).
 Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Item Item name Normal condition
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to No.
30 Ignition switch(IG1) ON
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Diagnose the KOS&OSS-ECU. Refer to
GROUP 42B, Troubleshooting P.42B-13.
NO : Go to Step 4.
Inspection Procedure 3: The key reminder switch signal is not received.
CAUTION  The ETACS-ECU may be defective

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The wiring harness or connectors may have
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi-
communication circuit are normal. nals pushed back in the connector
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) DIAGNOSIS

Input signal from the key reminder switch is used to
operate the functions below. If the signal is abnormal,
these functions will not work normally.
 Ignition key reminder tone alarm function
 Central door locking
 Keyless entry system STEP 1. Check the key reminder switch.
 Dome light Refer to P.54A-12.
. Q: Is the check result normal?
 The key reminder switch may be defective NO : Replace the key reminder switch.
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at key STEP 5. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
reminder switch connector (ground terminal) list.
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the CAUTION
wiring harness side. To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
(2) Measure the resistance between the key always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
reminder switch connector (ground terminal) and (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
ground. ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
less connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215."
Q: Is the check result normal? (2) Check the input signals from the key reminder
YES : Go to Step 4. switch.
NO : Go to Step 3.  Ignition switch: "LOCK" (OFF) (key inserted)
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line No.
between key reminder switch connector and the 28 Steering lock switch OFF
ground
Q: Is the check result normal? OK: Normal condition is displayed.
to GROUP 00  How to Use YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points  malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
P.00-13). Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. Malfunction P.00-13).
ground, and open circuit in HL1+ line between
ETACS-ECU connector and key reminder switch
connector
YES : Go to Step 5.
Inspection Procedure 4: The front door lock actuator (driver’s side) signal is not received.
.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The front door lock actuator (driver’s side) may
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the be defective
.

The front door lock actuator (driver’s side) input sig-
nal is used for the operation judgment of the func-
tions below. If the signal is abnormal, these functions
will not work normally.
DIAGNOSIS
 Central door locking Required Special Tools:
 Keyless entry system  MB991223: Harness Set
 Dome light  MB992006: Extra Fine Probe
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 1. Front door lock actuator (driver’s side) STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to
check ground, and open circuit in DSWL, DSWU line
Refer to GROUP 42A  Door P.42A-58. between ETACS-ECU connector and front door
lock actuator (RH) connector
YES : Go to Step 2. Q: Is the check result normal?
NO : Replace the front door lock actuator YES : Go to Step 5.
(driver’s side). NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at front door STEP 5. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
lock actuator (RH) connector (ground terminal) list.
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the CAUTION
wiring harness side. To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
(2) Measure the resistance between the door lock always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
actuator (RH) connector (ground terminal) and (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
ground. ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
less connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215."
Q: Is the check result normal? (2) Change the status of driver's door from unlocked
YES : Go to Step 4. to locked.
NO : Go to Step 3. Item No. Item name Normal
condition
STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line 20 Driver's door unlock ON  OFF
between front door lock actuator (RH) connector switch
and ground
21 Driver's door lock OFF  ON
Q: Is the check result normal? switch
How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction Q: Is the check result normal?
P.00-13). YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
Inspection Procedure 5: The front door switch (driver’s side) signal is not received.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The front door switch (driver’s side) may be
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the defective
.
If there is an error to the front door switch (driver’s nals pushed back in the connector
side) input signal, the door switch (driver’s side) sig-
nal is no longer output to the communication line. DIAGNOSIS
.

TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 1. Check the installation condition. STEP 4. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
Check that the front door switch (driver’s side) is list.
installed to the body correctly. CAUTION
Q: Is the check result normal? To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
YES : Go to Step 2. always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
NO : Correct the installation condition. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
STEP 2. Front door switch (driver’s side) check (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
Refer to GROUP 42A  Door P.42A-66. connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215."
(2) Open the driver's door.
YES : Go to Step 3. Item No. Item name Normal
NO : Replace the front door switch (driver’s side). condition
ground, and open circuit in DDSW line between OK: Normal condition is displayed.
ETACS-ECU connector and front door switch Q: Is the check result normal?
(driver’s side) connector YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
YES : Go to Step 4. use Troubleshooting/inspection Service
Inspection Procedure 6: The front door switch (passenger’s side) signal is not received.
CAUTION STEP 1. Check the installation condition.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the Check that the front door switch (passenger’s side) is
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the installed to the body correctly.
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Correct the installation condition.
If there is an error to the front door switch (passen-
ger’s side) input signal, the front door switch (pas-
senger’s side) signal is no longer output to the STEP 2. Front door switch (passenger’s side)
communication line. check
.
Refer to GROUP 42A  Door P.42A-66.
 The front door switch (passenger’s side) may be YES : Go to Step 3.
defective NO : Replace the front door switch (passenger’s
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective side).
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- STEP 3. Check of short to power supply, short to
nals pushed back in the connector ground, and open circuit in ADSW line between
ETACS-ECU connector and front door switch
DIAGNOSIS (passenger’s side) connector
Required Special Tools: Q: Is the check result normal?
 MB991223: Harness Set YES : Go to Step 4.
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 4. M.U.T.-III data list

CAUTION
(2) Open the front passenger's door.
condition
switch

Inspection procedure 7: One of the door switch signals (including the liftgate latch switch) is not
received.
.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The rear door switch (LH) may be defective
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the  The rear door switch (RH) may be defective
communication circuit are normal.  The liftgate latch switch may be defective

.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) The ETACS-ECU may be defective

If there is an error to the rear door switch or liftgate
latch switch input signal, the rear door switch signal
is no longer output to the communication line.
NOTE: When the right, left rear door or the liftgate is DIAGNOSIS
opened, the signal is also displayed as "Rear door
switch". Therefore, when "Rear door switch" signal is Required Special Tools:
displayed as abnormal, you should determine which  MB991223: Harness Set
signal line is defective by opening the rear doors and  MB992006: Extra Fine Probe
the liftgate one at a time.
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data door switch (LH) signal is not received
list. P.54A-245."
NO (When any of the rear doors or the liftgate is
CAUTION opened, normal condition is not displayed for item
To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), No. 49 for only a respective door or liftgate) : Go to
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" Step 2.
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- NO (When each of the rear doors or the liftgate is
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). opened, normal condition is displayed for item No.
(1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to 49 for none of the doors or liftgate) : Go to Step 5.
(2) Check signals from each door. STEP 2. Check the installation condition.
(3) Open the driver's and passenger's doors. Check that the rear door switch or the liftgate latch
Item No. Item name Normal switch is installed to the body correctly.
condition Q: Is the check result normal?
19 Driver's door ON YES : Go to Step 3.
switch NO : Correct the installation condition.
switch STEP 3. Check the rear door switches or the
liftgate latch switch.
OK: Normal condition is displayed. Check the rear door switches or the liftgate latch
switch. (Refer to GROUP 42A  Door Assembly
(4) Open the rear door (RH) with the other doors and
the liftgate closed. P.42A-66 (Door Switch) or Liftgate Handle Latch
P.42A-87 (Liftgate latch switch).)
condition Q: Is the check result normal?
YES : Go to Step 4.
49 Rear door switch ON NO : Replace the rear door switch or liftgate latch
switch.
(5) Open the rear door (LH) with the other doors and STEP 4. Check the wiring harness between each
the liftgate closed. rear door switch connector or the liftgate latch
Item No. Item name Normal switch connector and the ETACS-ECU connector.
condition  Check of short to power supply, short to ground,
and open circuit in DOOR line between
49 Rear door switch ON ETACS-ECU connector and rear door switch
(RH). <Rear door (RH)>
OK: Normal condition is displayed.  Check of short to power supply, short to ground,
(6) Open the liftgate with the other doors closed. and open circuit in DOOR line between
Item No. Item name Normal ETACS-ECU connector and rear door switch (LH)
condition connector. <Rear door (LH)>
 Check of short to power supply, short to ground,
49 Rear door switch ON and open circuit in DOOR line between
ETACS-ECU connector and liftgate latch switch
OK: Normal condition is displayed. connector. <Liftgate>
YES (Normal condition is displayed) : Go to Step YES : Go to Step 6.
6. NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
NO (Normal condition is not displayed for item No.
19) : Refer to Inspection Procedure 5 "The front
door switch (RH) signal is not received
P.54A-244."
NO (Normal condition is not displayed for item No.
48) : Refer to Inspection Procedure 6 "The front
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 5. Connector check: ETACS-ECU STEP 6. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
connector (DOOR terminal) list.
Open each of the rear doors and the liftgate.
YES : Go to Step 6. Item No. Item name Normal
NO : Repair the defective connector. condition
49 Rear door switch ON
OK: When each of the doors and the liftgate

is opened, normal condition is displayed for
all.
Inspection Procedure 8: The hazard warning light switch signal is not received.
CAUTION STEP 1. Check the hazard warning light switch.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the Refer to P.54A-140.
.
YES : Go to Step 2.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) NO : Replace the hazard warning switch.
Input signal from the hazard warning light switch is
used to operate the functions below. If the signal is STEP 2. Resistance measurement at hazard
abnormal, these functions will not work normally. warning switch connector (ground terminal)
 Keyless entry system (encrypted code registra- (1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
tion) wiring harness side.
 Hazard warning light (2) Measure the resistance between the hazard
.
warning switch connector (ground terminal) and
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ground.
 The hazard warning light switch may be defective OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective less
nals pushed back in the connector NO : Go to Step 3.
DIAGNOSIS STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line

Required Special Tools: between hazard warning switch connector and
 MB991223: Harness Set ground
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe Q: Is the check result normal?
P.00-13).
TSB Revision
ETACS
STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to STEP 5. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
ground, and open circuit in HAZ line between list.
ETACS-ECU connector and hazard warning CAUTION
switch connector To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
Q: Is the check result normal? always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
YES : Go to Step 5. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness. ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
(2) Check the input signals from the hazard warning
switch.
 Operate the hazard warning switch.
No.
26 Hazard warning light OFF to ON (only
switch when switch is
operated)

Inspection Procedure 9: The column switch signal is not received.
DIAGNOSIS
.

The ETACS-ECU receives the column switch signal
via the LIN communication. If there is an abnormality STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the
to column switch or LIN bus line, the lights and ETACS diagnostic trouble code
wiper/washer do not work normally. CAUTION
. To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III),
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
 The column switch assembly may be defective (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
 The LIN bus line may be defective ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
position.
Q: Is the DTC set?
YES : Troubleshoot the ETACS-ECU (Refer to
P.54A-218).
NO : Replace the column switch assembly.
TSB Revision
ETACS
Inspection Procedure 10: The stoplight switch signal is not received.
CAUTION STEP 3. Check of short to power supply, short to

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the ground, and open circuit in power supply line
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the between stoplight switch connector and fusible
communication circuit are normal. link
.

If there is an error to the stoplight switch input signal, YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer
the stoplight switch signal is no longer output to the to GROUP 00  How to Use
communication line. Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
P.00-13).
.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.

 The stoplight switch may be defective
 The wiring harness or connectors may have STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- ground, and open circuit in BKLP line between
nals pushed back in the connector ETACS-ECU connector and stoplight switch
connector
YES : Go to Step 5.
Required Special Tools: NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
list.
STEP 1. Check the stoplight switch.
Refer to GROUP 35A  Brake Pedal P.35A-26. CAUTION
Q: Is the check result normal? always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
YES : Go to Step 2. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
NO : Replace the stoplight switch.
STEP 2. Voltage measurement at stoplight switch connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215."
connector (power supply terminal) (2) Check the input signals from the stoplight switch.
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the  Brake pedal: depressed
(2) Check the voltage between the stoplight switch
No.
connector (power supply terminal) and ground.
OK: The voltage should measure approxi- 108 Stoplight switch OFF to ON (only
mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage). when switch is
operated)
YES : Go to Step 4. OK: Normal condition is displayed.
NO : Go to Step 3.
TSB Revision
ETACS
Inspection Procedure 11: The rear window defogger switch signal is not received. <vehicles with
manual air conditioning>
CAUTION STEP 3. Check of open circuit in ground line

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the between heater control panel connector and
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the ground
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) YES : Intermittent malfunction is suspected (Refer
Input signal from the rear window defogger switch is to GROUP 00  How to Use
used to operate the functions below. If the signal is Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points 
abnormal, these functions will not work normally. How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
 Rear window defogger P.00-13).
.
 The heater control panel (rear window defogger STEP 4. Check of short to power supply, short to
switch) may be defective ground, and open circuit in DFSW line between
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective ETACS-ECU connector and heater control panel
 The wiring harness or connectors may have connector
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- Q: Is the check result normal?
nals pushed back in the connector YES : Go to Step 5.
DIAGNOSIS
Required Special Tools: STEP 5. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
 MB991223: Harness Set list.
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe CAUTION
STEP 1. Check the rear window defogger switch. always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"
Refer to P.54A-140. (OFF) position before connecting or disconnect-
Q: Is the check result normal? (1) Connect scan tool (M.U.T.-III). Refer to "How to
YES : Go to Step 2. connect Scan Tool (M.U.T.-III) P.54A-215."
NO : Replace the heater control panel.
(2) Check the input signals from the rear window
defogger switch
STEP 2. Resistance measurement at heater  Operate the rear window defogger switch.
control panel connector (ground terminal)
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the
No.
(2) Measure the resistance between the heater 103 Rear defogger switch OFF to ON (only
control panel connector (ground terminal) and when switch is
ground. operated)
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or
less OK: Normal condition is displayed.

YES : Go to Step 4. YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
NO : Go to Step 3. malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
TSB Revision
ETACS
Inspection Procedure 12: The rear window defogger switch signal is not received. <vehicles with
automatic air conditioning>
CAUTION STEP 2. Check of short to power supply, short to

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the ground, and open circuit in DFSW line between
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the ETACS-ECU connector and auto A/C controller
communication circuit are normal. assembly (A/C-ECU) connector
.

Input signal from the rear window defogger switch is YES : Go to Step 3.
used to operate the functions below. If the signal is
abnormal, these functions will not work normally.
 Rear window defogger STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check data
.
list.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Check the ETACS-ECU system data list.
 The auto A/C controller assembly (rear window  Operate the rear window defogger switch.
defogger switch) may be defective Item Item name Normal condition
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective No.
103 Rear defogger switch OFF to ON (only
when switch is
operated)
DIAGNOSIS OK: Normal condition is displayed.
Required Special Tools: Q: Is the check result normal?
 MB991223: Harness Set YES : The trouble can be an intermittent
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe malfunction (Refer to GROUP 00  How to
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), check other Points  How to Cope with Intermittent
systems data list. Malfunction P.00-13).
CAUTION
(2) Check the A/C-ECU system data list.
 Operate the rear window defogger switch.
No.
60 Rear defogger switch OFF to ON (only
when switch is
operated)

YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the auto A/C controller assembly.
TSB Revision
ETACS
CHECK AT ECU TERMINAL

M1549001201860
C-417 C-416
C-407
AC706297AE
NOTE: C-407 (terminal numbers 1 to 20) cannot be

.
measured as the ETACS-ECU is mounted on the

junction block directly. The values are for reference
only.
CONNECTOR: C-407
Terminal Terminal Check item Check condition Normal
No. code condition
1 D/LOCK Power supply to the central door Always Battery
locking system (battery positive positive
voltage) voltage
2 EARTH Ground (for ECU) Always 1 V or less
3 TURN LH Output to left turn-signal lights When the left turn-signal lights Battery
are on positive
voltage
4 TURN RH Output to right turn-signal lights When the right turn-signal lights Battery
are on positive
voltage
5 HAZ1 Power supply to hazard warning Always Battery
light (battery positive voltage) positive
voltage
6 F/WIP-AS Input of windshield wiper automatic When windshield wipers are Battery
stop signal operating positive
voltage
7 F/WIP-HI Output to windshield wiper When windshield wipers are Battery
(high-speed operation) operating at high speed positive
voltage
8 F/WIP-LO Output to windshield wiper (low When windshield wipers are Battery
speed operation) operating at low speed positive
voltage
9 F/WIP-W Output to windshield washer When windshield washer is Battery
ASH operating positive
voltage
10 FR WIP Power supply to windshield Ignition switch: ACC Battery
ACC wiper/washer (ignition switch: ACC) positive
voltage
11 RR WIP Power supply to rear wiper (ignition Ignition switch: ACC Battery
ACC switch: ACC) positive
voltage
TSB Revision
ETACS

No. code condition
12 R/WIP-W Output to rear washer When rear washer is operating Battery
ASH positive
voltage
13 RR WIP Output to rear wiper When rear wiper is operating Battery
MTR positive
voltage
14 RR WIP Input of rear wiper automatic stop When rear wiper is operating Battery
AUTO signal positive
STP voltage
15 TAIL LP Output to taillights When the taillights are on Battery
positive
voltage
16 TAIL +B Battery power supply (for taillights) Always Battery
positive
voltage
17 H/LP LO Output to low-beam headlights When low-beam headlights are Battery
on positive
voltage
18 ROOM Output to dome light When the dome light is on Pulse signal
LP
19 H/LP HI Output to high-beam headlights When high-beam headlights are Battery
on positive
voltage
20 ETACS Battery power supply (for ECU) Always Battery
+B positive
voltage
.
CONNECTOR: C-417
No. code condition
21    
22 RL-U Output to central door locking (for When the door lock actuators Battery
unlocking the doors) unlock the doors positive
voltage
23 RR-L Output to central door locking (for When the door lock actuators lock Battery
locking the doors) the doors positive
voltage
24 DHOR Output to horn Panic alarm system: ON Battery
positive
voltage
25  35    
36 DSWL Input to front door lock actuator Driver's door lock: locked 1 V or less
(RH) (lock switch)
37  40    
TSB Revision
ETACS

No. code condition
41 DSWU Input to front door lock actuator Driver's door lock: Unlocked 1 V or less
(unlock switch)
42, 43    
44 IG2 Power supply from ignition switch Ignition switch: ON Battery
(IG2) positive
voltage
.
CONNECTOR: C-416
No. code condition
51 DDSW Input from driver's door switch Driver's door switch: ON (door 1 V or less
open)
52 DEF1 Output to the rear window defogger When the rear window defogger Battery
relay are operative positive
voltage
53 HL1+ Input to key reminder switch Key reminder switch: ON (Ignition 1 V or less
key removed)
54 LIN LIN communication line Always 0 to 12 V
(pulse
signal)
55 SLSO Shift lock solenoid When all the following conditions Battery
are met. positive
 Ignition switch: ON voltage
 Brake pedal: depressed
56 CANH CAN_H  
57 ANT- Output of key ring antenna signal Always 1V or less
58 ANT+ Input of key ring antenna signal Always 1V or less
59 B.PW Output to the power window relay When the power windows are Battery
operative positive
voltage
60    
61 DOOR Input from the rear door switches or  One of the rear door switches: 1 V or less
liftgate switch ON (door open)
 Liftgate switch: ON (liftgate
open)
62 ROOM Output to luggage compartment When the luggage compartment Pulse signal
light light is on
63 ADSW Input from the front passenger’s One of the front passenger’s door 1 V or less
door switch switch: ON (door open)
64 WB/U Back-up input from windshield Windshield low-speed wiper 1 V or less
wiper switch switch or windshield high-speed
wiper switch: ON
65 CANL CAN_L  
TSB Revision
ETACS

No. code condition
66    
67 FOGY Output to front fog light When the front fog light is on Battery
positive
voltage
68 IG1 Power supply from ignition switch Ignition switch: ON or START Battery
(IG1) positive
voltage
69 DFSW Input from rear window defogger Rear window defogger switch: 1 V or less
switch ON
70 SGND Ground (for sensor) Always 1 V or less
71 HAZ Input from hazard warning light Hazard warning light switch: ON 1 V or less
switch
72 BKLP Input from stoplight switch Stoplight switch: ON 5V
73    
74 ACC1 Power supply from ignition switch Ignition switch: ON or ACC Battery
(ACC) positive
voltage
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
M1545002501839
is disconnected.
display)
Turn power Adjustment of ACC or IG1 Operable with ACC or ON position
source turn-signal light IG1 Operable with ON position (initial
operation condition condition)
Comfort flasher With/without Disable No function
comfort flasher Enable With function (Initial condition)
function
Comfort flasher Switch operation 400ms 0.4 second (Initial condition)
switch time time to activate the 800ms 0.8 second
comfort flasher
function
TSB Revision
ETACS

display)
Hazard answer Adjustment of the Lock:1, Unlock:2 LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: Flashes
back number of keyless twice (Initial condition)
hazard warning light Lock:1, Unlock:0 LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: No flash
answer back
flashes Lock:0, Unlock:2 LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash twice
Lock:2, Unlock:1 LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:2, Unlock:0 LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:1 LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:0, Unlock:0 No function
Vehicle Disabling or inhibit No function
speed-depende enabling vehicle operation With function (Initial condition)
nt wiper speed-dependent
wiper function
Wiper Disabling or inhibit No function (Only washer operation)
synchronized enabling operation With function (Initial condition)
washer washer-linked wiper
function
Intermittent time Adjustment of rear 8 sec. 8 second (Initial condition)
of rear wiper wiper interval 4sec/continuous 4 second (With low speed mode)
8sec/continuous 8 second (With low speed mode)
16sec/continuous 16 second (With low speed mode)
0 sec. 0second (Continuous operation)
4 sec. 4 second
16 sec. 16 second
Headlight auto Adjustment of Disable No function
cut customize headlight automatic Enable (C-spec.) With function (Initial condition)
shutdown function
Door unlock Adjustment of All Doors Unlock The first operation of keyless entry system
mode power door locks or unlock operation by KOS unlocks all
with selective doors.
unlocking Dr Door Unlock The first operation of keyless entry system
or unlock operation by KOS unlocks the
driver's door only, and the second unlock
operation within 2 seconds after that
unlocks all doors. (initial condition)
Door unlock Adjustment of the Disable No function (Initial condition)
(Shift "P" auto door unlock (P Enable Always with function
position) position) function
TSB Revision
ETACS

display)
Buzzer answer Adjusts the buzzer Not Sound Buzzer No function
back answer back At F.A.S.T. Sounds when KOS is activated. (Initial
function. <vehicles condition)
with KOS>
At keyless Sounds when the keyless entry system is
activated.
At Both Sounds when the keyless entry system or
KOS is activated.
Interior light Adjustment of 0 sec. 0 second (no delay shutdown time)
delay time interior light delay 7.5 sec. 7.5 seconds <Initial condition (vehicles
shutdown time without central door locking system)>
15 sec. 15 seconds
30 sec. 30 seconds <Initial condition (vehicles with
central door locking system)>
60 sec. 60 seconds
Timer lock timer Timer lock period 30 sec. 30 seconds (Initial condition)
adjustment 60 sec. 60 seconds
Horn chirp by Horn chirp by Not sound horn No horn answerback function
keyless keyless entry Lock any time The horn sounds when the lock button of
system keyless entry transmitter is pressed once.
W lock any time The horn sounds when the lock button of
keyless entry transmitter is pressed twice.
(initial condition)
Interior light Adjustment of Disable No function
auto cut timer interior light 30min With function (Initial condition)
automatic shutoff
function (only dome
light switch is door
position)
F.A.S.T. feature KOS function Both enable All KOS functions are enabled. (Initial
adjustment condition)
Door Entry enable Only door entry function is enabled.
ENG start enable Only engine starting function is enabled.
Both disable All KOS functions are disabled.
F.A.S.T.key With/without KOS Disable No function (Initial condition)
detect out fm key exterior Enable With function
window detection function
TSB Revision
ETACS

display)
Outer buzzer Volume adjustment Volume 1 Quieter than the standard
volume for the KOS outer Volume 2 Standard volume (Initial condition)
buzzer
Volume 3 Louder than the standard
ACC automatic Disabling or Disable No function
cut timer (OSS) enabling of ACC 30 min 30 minutes (initial condition)
power auto cut
function or 60 min 60 minutes
adjustment of the
time until the ACC
power supply is cut
off <Vehicles with
OSS>.
TSB Revision
ETACS
ETACS-ECU
M1545004700676
CAUTION
 When the ETACS-ECU is replaced, VIN writing and coding must be performed. When DTC
No.B1760 "Coding not completed" or B1761 "VIN not programmed" is set in the ETACS-ECU, per-
form VIN writing and coding. Refer to the "M.U.T.-III operation manual" and perform coding.
 When the ETACS-ECU of vehicles without KOS is replaced, the encrypted code of the ignition key
needs to be registered to the ETACS-ECU. <Vehicles with Immobilizer System> (If the encrypted
code is not registered, the engine cannot be started. For the details of code registration proce-
dure, refer to the ID registration procedure manual.)
 Removal of Instrument panel lower assembly (Refer to  Installation of Instrument panel lower assembly (Refer to
GROUP 52A  Instrument Lower Panel P.52A-6) GROUP 52A  Instrument Lower Panel P.52A-6)
4.0 ± 1.0 N·m

35 ± 8 in-lb
1 3
4
4.0 ± 1.0 N·m

35 ± 8 in-lb
4.0 ± 1.0 N·m

35 ± 8 in-lb
ACC05529AC

1. Junction block/ETACS-ECU 3. ETACS-ECU
2. Junction block 4. Junction block bracket
TSB Revision
PANIC ALARM
PANIC ALARM
DIAGNOSIS
M1547001200270
tents P.00-6.
M1547001501285
Trouble symptom Reference

page
Panic alarm does not work normally. P.54A-261
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Panic alarm does not work normally.

.

Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the  The keyless entry system <vehicles without
power supply circuit, the ground circuit and the KOS> or keyless operation system <vehicles with
communication circuit are normal. KOS> may be defective
.

If keyless entry system <vehicles without KOS> or
keyless operation system <vehicles with KOS> is
normal, the ETACS-ECU may be defective.
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check keyless entry system <vehicles without

KOS> or keyless operation system <vehicles with KOS>.
Q: Do keyless entry system <vehicles without KOS> or
keyless operation system <vehicles with KOS> work
normally?
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO <vehicles without KOS> : Troubleshoot the keyless
entry system (Refer to GROUP 42A, Keyless Entry
System P.42A-89).
NO <vehicles with KOS> : Troubleshoot the KOS (Refer to
GROUP 42B, KOS P.42B-13).
TSB Revision
PANIC ALARM
STEP 2. Check that the headlight operate.

Check that the headlight illuminate normally.
YES : Go to Step 3.
NO : Troubleshoot the headlight. Refer to P.54A-74.

and open circuit in DHOR line between horn relay
connector and ETACS-ECU connector
YES : Go to Step 4.

Q: Does the panic alarm work normally?
M1547002600088
Panic alarm system component parts  Horn (refer to P.54A-141).

 Headlight assembly (refer to P.54A-98).
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER
DEFOGGER
SPECIAL TOOLS
M1547000600480

name
a a. MB992744  DTC and service data check.
b. MB992745
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER

name
a
b pushing V.C.I. DTC and service data check.
f. MB991825
ENTER key.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1540500700038
tents P.00-6.

M1540500800240
Trouble symptom Reference page

The rear window defogger does not work. <vehicles with P.54A-266
manual air
conditioning>
<vehicles with P.54A-268
automatic air
conditioning>
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
The rear window defogger does not work. <vehicles with manual air conditioning>
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the
If the rear window defogger does not work after ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
switching on (the defogger timer will be on for Check that the ETACS-ECU has not set a DTC.
approximately 20 minutes), the rear window defog- Q: Is the DTC stored?
ger relay circuit may be defective. YES : Carry out the DTC procedures. Refer to
NOTE: This system does not work while the engine P.54A-218.
is off. NO : Go to Step 3.
.

 The rear window defogger relay may be defective engine control module diagnostic trouble code
 The heater control panel may be defective Check that the engine control module has not set a
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective DTC.
 The wiring harness or connectors may have Q: Is the DTC stored?
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- YES : Troubleshoot the MFI (Refer to GROUP
nals pushed back in the connector 13A  DTC Chart P.13A-47.)
NO : Go to Step 4.
DIAGNOSIS
 MB991223: Harness Set list
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe Check the ETACS-ECU system data list.
 Start the engine.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the  Turn the rear window defogger switch from off to
CAN bus line on.
CAUTION Item No. Item name Normal

To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), condition
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" 103 Rear defogger OFF to ON (only
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- switch when switch is
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). operated)
YES : Go to Step 5.
position.
STEP 5. Check the rear window defogger relay.
Refer to P.54A-271.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP Q: Is the check result normal?
54C  Troubleshooting P.54C-12). YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Replace the defogger relay.
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER
STEP 6. Voltage measurement at the rear window STEP 9. Check of short to power supply, and
defogger connector. open circuit in power supply line between rear
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the window defogger relay connector and fusible
wiring harness side. link.
(2) Start the engine. Q: Is the check result normal?
(3) Rear window defogger switch: ON. YES : Intermittent malfunction (Refer to GROUP
(4) Measure the voltage between the rear window 00  How to Use
defogger connector (power supply terminal) and Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points -
the ground. How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
OK: The voltage should measure approxi- P.00-13).
mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage). NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
YES : Go to Step 7. STEP 10. Voltage measurement at the rear
NO : Go to Step 8. window defogger relay connector.
(1) Remove the relay, and measure at the junction
STEP 7. Resistance measurement at the rear block side.
window defogger connector. (2) Ignition switch: ON.
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the (3) Measure the voltage between the rear window
wiring harness side. defogger relay connector (input terminal) and the
(2) Measure the resistance between the rear window ground.
defogger connector (ground terminal) and the OK: The voltage should measure approxi-
ground. mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage).
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or Q: Is the check result normal?
less YES : Go to Step 12.
Q: Is the check result normal? NO : Go to Step 11.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness STEP 11. Check of short to power supply, and
wires between rear window defogger open circuit in input line between rear window
connector terminal and ground. defogger relay connector and ignition switch
(IG2).
STEP 8. Voltage measurement at the rear window Q: Is the check result normal?
defogger relay connector. YES : Intermittent malfunction (Refer to GROUP
(1) Remove the relay, and measure at the junction 00  How to Use
block side. Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points -
(2) Measure the voltage between the rear window How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
defogger relay connector (power supply terminal) P.00-13).
and the ground. NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
Q: Is the check result normal? open circuit in DEF1 line between rear window
YES : Go to Step 10. defogger relay connector and ETACS-ECU.
NO : Go to Step 9.
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER
STEP 13. Check the rear window defogger.

Check the rear window defogger (Refer to
P.54A-271).
NO : Replace the rear window glass.
The rear window defogger does not work. <vehicles with automatic air conditioning>
.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (COMMENT) STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the
If the rear window defogger does not work after ETACS diagnostic trouble code.
switching on (the defogger timer will be on for Check that the ETACS-ECU has not set a DTC.
approximately 20 minutes), the rear window defog- Q: Is the DTC stored?
ger relay circuit may be defective. YES : Carry out the DTC procedures. Refer to
NOTE: This system does not work while the engine P.54A-218.
is off. NO : Go to Step 3.
.

 The rear window defogger relay may be defective engine control module diagnostic trouble code
 The A/C-ECU may be defective Check that the engine control module has not set a
 The ETACS-ECU may be defective DTC.
 The wiring harness or connectors may have Q: Is the DTC stored?
loose, corroded, or damaged terminals, or termi- YES : Troubleshoot the MFI (Refer to GROUP
nals pushed back in the connector 13A  DTC Chart P.13A-47.)
NO : Go to Step 4.
DIAGNOSIS
 MB991223: Harness Set list
 MB992006: Extra Fine Probe Check the ETACS-ECU system data list.
 Start the engine.
STEP 1. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), diagnose the  Turn the rear window defogger switch from off to
CAN bus line on.
CAUTION Item No. Item name Normal

To prevent damage to scan tool (M.U.T.-III), condition
always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" 103 Rear defogger OFF to ON (only
(OFF) position before connecting or disconnect- switch when switch is
ing scan tool (M.U.T.-III). operated)
YES : Go to Step 5.
position.
STEP 5. Check the rear window defogger relay.
Refer to P.54A-271.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Repair the CAN bus line (Refer to GROUP Q: Is the check result normal?
54C  Troubleshooting P.54C-12). YES : Go to Step 6.
NO : Replace the defogger relay.
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER
STEP 6. Voltage measurement at the rear window STEP 9. Check of short to power supply, and
defogger connector. open circuit in power supply line between rear
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the window defogger relay connector and fusible
wiring harness side. link.
(2) Start the engine. Q: Is the check result normal?
(3) Rear window defogger switch: ON. YES : Intermittent malfunction (Refer to GROUP
(4) Measure the voltage between the rear window 00  How to Use
defogger connector (power supply terminal) and Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points -
the ground. How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
OK: The voltage should measure approxi- P.00-13).
mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage). NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
YES : Go to Step 7. STEP 10. Voltage measurement at the rear
NO : Go to Step 8. window defogger relay connector.
(1) Remove the relay, and measure at the junction
STEP 7. Resistance measurement at the rear block side.
window defogger connector. (2) Ignition switch: ON.
(1) Disconnect the connector, and measure at the (3) Measure the voltage between the rear window
wiring harness side. defogger relay connector (input terminal) and the
(2) Measure the resistance between the rear window ground.
defogger connector (ground terminal) and the OK: The voltage should measure approxi-
ground. mately 12 volts (battery positive voltage).
OK: The resistance should be 2 ohms or Q: Is the check result normal?
less YES : Go to Step 12.
Q: Is the check result normal? NO : Go to Step 11.
NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness STEP 11. Check of short to power supply, and
wires between rear window defogger open circuit in input line between rear window
connector terminal and ground. defogger relay connector and ignition switch
(IG2).
STEP 8. Voltage measurement at the rear window Q: Is the check result normal?
defogger relay connector. YES : Intermittent malfunction (Refer to GROUP
(1) Remove the relay, and measure at the junction 00  How to Use
block side. Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Points -
(2) Measure the voltage between the rear window How to Cope with Intermittent Malfunction
defogger relay connector (power supply terminal) P.00-13).
and the ground. NO : Repair the connector(s) or wiring harness.
Q: Is the check result normal? open circuit in DEF1 line between rear window
YES : Go to Step 10. defogger relay connector and ETACS-ECU.
NO : Go to Step 9.
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER
STEP 13. Check the rear window defogger.

Check the rear window defogger (Refer to
P.54A-271).
NO : Replace the rear window glass.
M1540600200375
Refer to GROUP 55A  Heater Control Unit
P.55A-29 <vehicles with manual air conditioning>,
GROUP 55B  Heater Control Unit P.55B-42 <vehi-
cles with automatic air conditioning>.
INSPECTION
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

CONTINUITY CHECK <VEHICLES WITH MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONING>
M1540600400067
Switch position Terminal Normal

number condition
OFF 57 No
continuity
ON Continuity
exists (2
ohms or
ACB04942 AB
less)
TSB Revision
DEFOGGER
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
PRINTED HEATER CHECK

M1540500500476
Normal characteristics of print heater

1. Let the engine run (2,000 r/min), and check the printed
Voltage (V) heater with the battery fully charged.
12 2. With the rear window defogger switch "ON," use the circuit
tester to measure the voltage of each printed heater at the
A (middle point) rear window glass center A point. If approximately 6 V is
6 Approximately 6 V indicated, it is judged good.
3. If the voltage of 12 V is indicated at the A point, there is an
0 open circuit between the A point and negative terminal.
(+) terminal (-) terminal
Therefore, by moving the test bar slowly to the negative
Length of print heater
side, search and determine the location where the voltage
Abnormal characteristics of print heater
changes suddenly (0 V). The location of voltage change
indicates the open circuit position.
Voltage (V)
12 Disconnection 4. Also, if the voltage indicates 0 V at the A point, there is an
location open circuit between the A point and positive terminal.
Therefore, search and determine the location of voltage
6 change (12 V) using the above mentioned method.
5. If a malfunction such as open circuit occurs, replace the
0 liftgate window glass.(Refer to GROUP 42A  Liftgate
(+) terminal (-) terminal Window Glass P.42A-21.)
Length of print heater
AC407247AD
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CHECK

M1540500600451

number condition
continuity
()] ohms or
Rear window
defogger relay less)
ACB05847 AB
TSB Revision
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <VEHICLES WITHOUT KOS>

SPECIAL TOOLS
M1541106600131

name
a a. MB992744  DTC check.
b. MB992745
c. MB992746
d. MB992747
e. MB992748
MB992744
a. Vehicle
communication
b
interface-Lite
(V.C.I.-Lite)
b. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness A (for
CAN
c communication)
c. V.C.I.-Lite main
harness B (for
CAN
d. V.C.I.-Lite USB
d cable short
e. V.C.I.-Lite USB
cable long
MB992747
MB992748
ACB05421AB
TSB Revision

name
a
b pushing V.C.I. DTC check.
f. MB991825
ENTER key.
g. MB991826
M.U.T.-III
sub-assembly
MB991827 a. Vehicle
c
communication
interface (V.C.I.)
b. M.U.T.-III USB
cable
d harness A
(Vehicles with
DO NOT USE CAN
communication
MB991911
system)
d. M.U.T.-III main
e
harness B
(Vehicles
communication
MB991914 system)
harness C (for
Chrysler
models only)
g
measurement
adapter
harness
MB991826
MB991958
TSB Revision

name
a
Harness set
circuit
c. LED harness
tester
d. Probe
d
DO NOT USE
MB991223BA

connector
MB992006
DIAGNOSIS
M1541106700149
tents P.00-6.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
M1541100500244

(V.C.I.-Lite)
TSB Revision
CAUTION
Data link connector
position.
MB992745, MB991910
MB992744, MB991824
MB992747, MB992748, MB991827 ACC02853 AB
color.

TROUBLE CODES
(V.C.I.-Lite)
display.
button.
TSB Revision


(V.C.I.-Lite)
"OK" button.

.
When detecting fault and storing the DTC, the ECU connected to CAN bus line obtains the data before the
determination of the DTC and the data when the DTC is determined, and then stores the ECU status of that
time. By analyzing each data from scan tool (M.U.T.-III), the troubleshooting can be performed more effi-
ciently. The displayed items are as the table below.
Display item list
1 Odometer Total driving distance after the DTC is km
generated
2 Ignition cycle Number of times the ignition switch is turned Number of
"ON" or "LOCK (OFF)" after the past failure counts is
transition. displayed.
3 Elapsed time Total elapsed time after a DTC is generated min
TSB Revision

DTC
M1541100400258
CAUTION
Code No. Diagnosis contents Reference page

B1702 Transponder read error P.54A-277
B1703 Transponder ID unmatched P.54A-279
B1722 Immobilizer-antenna fail P.54A-280
B1731 PCM authentification timeout P.54A-281
B1766 Already learned by other vehicle P.54A-283
B1A28 PCM authentification error P.54A-284
DTC B1702: Transponder read error
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.
OPERATION
The key reminder switch (ignition key ring antenna) supplies
the ignition key with power, and the ignition key sends the key
ID to the ETACS-ECU. ETACS-ECU receives the key ID with
the key ring antenna, and judges if the ignition key is the regis-
tered one.
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
 DTC No.B1702 is stored when there are other ignition keys
or anything that interferes with the communication (things
that generate radio waves such as magnets and an
air-cleaning device that has a power plug) near the ignition
key that is going to start the engine.
 If the key ID is not sent to the ETACS-ECU even when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, DTC No.B1702
is stored.
NOTE: DTC No.B1702 is always set along with MFI system
DTC No.P0513.
.
 Interference of the key ID
TSB Revision
 The key ring antenna (antenna wire)* may be defective.

NOTE: *: The DTC No. B1722 will be set if a trouble occurs
in the key ring antenna.
 The ignition key may be defective.
DIAGNOSIS

CAUTION
(2) Check if DTC No. B1722 is stored in the ETACS-ECU.
YES : Refer to P.54A-280.
NO : Go to Step 2.
STEP 2. Check the ignition key inserted in the key hole for
interference.
Q: Are there other ignition keys or anything that interferes
with the communication (things that generate radio
waves such as magnets and an air-cleaning device that
has a power plug) near the ignition key inserted in the
key hole?
YES : Move away or remove other ignition keys or things
that interfere with the communication (things that
generate radio waves such as magnets and a
air-cleaning device that has a power plug) near the
ignition key. Then, go to Step 4.
NO : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Check with the spare key that has already been
registered.
Check that the engine starts using the spare key that has
already been registered.
YES : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After registering the ID
codes, go to Step 4.
NO : Replace the ignition key for which DTC No.B1702 is
stored, and register the ID codes again (Refer to
P.54A-290). After registering the ID codes, go to Step
4.
TSB Revision

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" (OFF) position once,
and then turn it to the ON position again.
(2) On completion, check that DTC No.B1702 is not reset.
NO : The diagnosis is complete. If another DTC is stored,
refer to DTC Chart P.54A-277.
DTC B1703: Transponder ID unmatched
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
When the key ID that is sent from the transponder does not cor-
respond to the key ID registered in the ETACS-ECU, the
ETACS-ECU stores DTC No.B1703.
DTC No.P0513.
.
 Ignition key (key ID) is not registered
DIAGNOSIS
Register all the ignition key IDs again, and recheck the
DTC.
CAUTION
(2) Register all the ignition keys again (Refer to P.54A-290).
(3) Turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK" (OFF) position to
the ON position.
(4) Check that DTC No.B1703 is not reset.
codes, check if the DTC is stored.
TSB Revision
DTC B1722: Immobilizer-antenna fail
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
DTC No.B1722 is stored when the ETACS-ECU cannot com-
municate with the ignition key because of defective key ring
antenna (antenna wire).
.

Current trouble
 The wiring harness wire or connectors between the
ETACS-ECU and the key ring antenna may have loose, cor-
roded, or damage terminals, or terminals pushed back in
the connector, or the key ring antenna (antenna wire) may
be defective.
Past trouble
 If DTC No.B1722 is stored as a past trouble, it is possible
that there were defective wiring harnesses, defective con-
nectors or defective antennas before.
.
 The key ring antenna (antenna wire) may be defective
the connector
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Check the key reminder switch (ignition key ring

antenna)
(1) Disconnect the key reminder switch (ignition key ring
antenna) connector.
(2) Take the measurements below at component-side
connector.
 There should be continuity between terminals 3 and 7.
Q: Is the check result satisfactory?
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Replace the key reminder switch (ignition key ring
antenna), and then go to Step 4.
TSB Revision

and open circuit in ANT+, ANT- line between ETACS-ECU
connector and key reminder switch connector
YES : Go to Step 3.
go to Step 3.

CAUTION
(3) Check if DTC No.B1722 is stored as a current trouble.
Q: Is DTC No.B1722 set as a current trouble?
YES : Replace the key reminder switch (ignition key ring
antenna), and then go to Step 4.
NO : If DTC No.B1722 is stored as a past trouble, erase
the DTC that is stored as a past trouble, and the
diagnosis is complete.

(2) Check if DTC No.B1722 is stored as a current trouble.
Q: Is DTC No.B1722 set as a current trouble?
codes, return to Step 1.
NO : If DTC No.B1722 is stored as a past trouble, erase
the DTC that is stored as a past trouble, and the
diagnosis is complete.
DTC B1731: PCM authentification timeout
CAUTION
 If DTC No.B1731 is stored in the ETACS-ECU, diagnose
the CAN main bus line.
 Whenever the ECU is replaced, ensure that the power
supply circuit, the ground circuit and the communica-
tion circuit are normal.
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
If the ETACS-ECU cannot receive any signals from the engine
control module, DTC No. B1731 will be set.
.
TSB Revision

Connector(s) or wiring harness in the CAN bus lines between
the ETACS-ECU and the engine control module, the power
supply system to the engine control module, the engine control
module itself, or the ETACS-ECU itself may be defective.
DTC No.U0167.
.
 The engine control module may be defective
DIAGNOSIS

line
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 2.
Troubleshooting). Repair the CAN bus line and go to
Step 3.

Check again if the DTC is stored.
(2) Check that DTC No.B1731 is not set as a current trouble.
codes, go to Step 3.
TSB Revision

(2) Check that DTC No.B1731 is not set as a current trouble.
YES : Replace the engine control module and resister the ID
code.
DTC B1766: Already learned by other vehicle
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
If the key registered for another vehicle is used to start the
engine, the ETACS-ECU stores DTC No.B1766.
.
 Ignition key (key ID) is another vehicle's key
 Ignition key (key ID) is new key
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. All ignition keys registration

Check that the all ignition keys are registered.
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Register the all ignition keys. Refer to P.54A-290.
TSB Revision

line
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 3.
Troubleshooting P.54C-12). Repair the CAN bus line.
STEP 3. Check with another key that has already been

registered.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using another
key that has already been registered.
(2) Check that DTC No.B1766 is not set.
YES : Replace the all ignition keys or by the service key set,
and register the ID codes (Refer to P.54A-290). After
registering the ID codes, go to Step 4.
NO : Replace the ignition key that the DTC is stored, and
register the ID codes again (Refer to P.54A-290).
After registering the ID codes, go to Step 4.

Check again if the DTC is stored.
(2) Check that DTC No.B1766 is not set.
DTC B1A28: PCM authentification error
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.
TROUBLE JUDGMENT
ETACS-ECU stores DTC No. B1A28 when the ETACS-ECU's
key certification result and the engine control module's starting
condition do not match.
.
TSB Revision

ETACS-ECU determines that the abnormality is present, if the
key certification result OK but engine control module prohibits
engine start by immobilizer function or key certification result
NG but engine permits engine starts.
.
 Chassis number registered in engine control module
unmatched
DIAGNOSIS

line
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 2.
STEP 2. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the engine control

module diagnostic trouble code
Check if DTC is stored in the engine control module.
YES : Troubleshoot the MFI (Refer to GROUP 13A  DTC
Chart P.13A-47.)
NO : Go to Step 3.

Check if DTC No. B1761 or B2206 is stored in the
ETACS-ECU.
YES : Perform the troubleshooting of the DTC that has been
set.
NO : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision

(1) Once key is removed from the ignition cylinder and then
turn the ignition switch from the LOCK (OFF) position to the
ON position.
YES : Replace ETACS-ECU. Then go to Step 5.

(1) Turn the ignition switch from the LOCK (OFF) position to the
ON position.
YES : Replace the engine control module and register the
chassis number and key codes [Refer to GROUP 00
 How to Perform Chassis Number (Chassis No.)
Writing P.00-26].

M1541100300176
CAUTION
procedure No. page
The ignition key cannot be registered with the scan tool (M.U.T.-III). 1 P.54A-286
The engine does not start (Cranking occurs but initial combustion does not). 2 P.54A-288
SYMPTOM PROCEDURES
Inspection Procedure 1: The ignition key cannot be registered with the scan tool (M.U.T.-III).
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.

If only some ignition keys cannot be registered, the ignition key
itself may be defective. If no ignition key can be registered, the
key assembly may have already been registered for another
vehicle, or the ETACS-ECU may be defective.
.
TSB Revision
 The ignition key may be defective
 Transponder registered for other vehicle
DIAGNOSIS

line
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 2.
Troubleshooting). Repair the CAN bus line.
STEP 2. Check the ignition key inserted in the key hole for
interference.
Q: Are there other ignition keys or anything that interferes
with the communication (things that generate radio
waves such as magnets and an air-cleaning device that
has a power plug) near the ignition key inserted in the
key hole?
YES : Move away or remove other ignition keys or things
that interfere with the communication (things that
generate radio waves such as magnets and a
air-cleaning device that has a power plug) near the
ignition key. Then, go to step 3.
NO : Go to Step 4.

Check that the ignition key can be registered.
NO : Go to Step 4.
TSB Revision
STEP 4. Check which ignition key cannot be registered.

Q: Are there only some ignition keys that cannot be
registered?
Only some keys : Replace the key that cannot be
registered and register the ID codes (Refer to
P.54A-290). After registering the ID codes, go to Step
6.
All keys : Go to Step 5.

Check the scan tool (M.U.T.-III) screen when the key was not
able to be registered.
Q: Which error message did the scan tool (M.U.T.-III)
display?
Defective key : Carry out the troubleshooting for DTC No.
B1722 "Immobilizer-antenna fail" (Refer to
P.54A-280). Then, go to Step 6.
ECU internal error : Replace the ETACS-ECU. After
registering the ID codes, go to Step 6.

Check that the ignition key can be registered.
Inspection Procedure 2: The engine does not start (cranking occurs but initial combustion does not).
CAUTION
cuit are normal.
.

If the fuel injection does not work, the ETACS- ECU and the
MFI system may be defective. It is no problem with the mal-
function above when the engine is started with unregistered
ignition key.
.
 The ignition key may be defective
 VIN not written
TSB Revision
DIAGNOSIS
STEP 1. Battery voltage check

Measure the battery voltage when cranking.
OK: 8 V or more
YES : Go to Step 2.
NO : Check the battery (Refer to P.54A-5).

line
CAUTION
YES : Go to Step 3.
STEP 3. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), read the engine control

module diagnostic trouble code
Check if DTC is stored in the engine control module.
YES : Troubleshoot the MFI (Refer to GROUP 13A  DTC
Chart P.13A-47.)
NO : Go to Step 4.

Check whether the engine immobilizer system-related DTC is
stored.
YES : Refer to P.54A-277.
NO : Go to Step 5.
STEP 5. Check that the engine starts.

Q: Does the engine start?
NO : Refer to GROUP 13A, Troubleshooting P.13A-52. Go
to Step 6.
TSB Revision
STEP 6. Check that the engine starts.

Q: Does the engine start?
DATA LIST REFERENCE TABLE
M1541104000092
Item No. Inspection item Inspection Normal condition

requirement
1 Memorized transponder keys  Number of registered ignition keys
CHECK ETACS-ECU (IMMOBILIZER-ECU)

M1541104100226
TERMINAL VOLTAGE CHECK TABLE

Refer to ETACS P.54A-253.
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
HOW TO REGISTER KEY ID

M1541104300725
For details of the key registration procedure, refer to the ID registration manual.
M1541106900206
Refer to ETACS-ECU removal and installation
P.54A-260.
TSB Revision

Etacs Mitsubishi 5100 54a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Etacs Mitsubishi 5100 54a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

54A-1

BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-4 COMBINATION METER . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-12

WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES

COMBINATION METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-61 HIGH-MOUNTED STOPLIGHT. . . . . . 54A-132

SYMPTOM PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-156 ETACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-213

STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL  DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-274

FLUID LEVEL AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK

flat battery fully is shown in the charge rate chart.

Charge Rate Chart

STEP 5. Battery charging STEP 6. Check the load test.

LOAD TEST RATE CHART

LOAD TEST CHART

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

7 4.0 ± 1.0 N·m

9.0 ± 2.0 N·m

9.0 ± 2.0 N·m 4

Removal steps Removal steps (Continued)

Tool Tool number and Supersession Application

MB992006  Continuity check and voltage

MB990784 Ornament Lower panel and steering column

STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE

Malfunction of the ignition switch power supply system

CAUTION STEP 2. Check the fuse.

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS STEP 3. Check of open circuit in power supply

IGNITION KEY REMINDER TONE ALARM

2. Open the driver's door.

Pre-removal operation Post-installation operation

Removal Steps Removal Steps (Continued)

REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

<<A>> STEERING LOCK HOLE REMOVAL

3. Subsequently, using a flat-tipped precision screwdriver or

IGNITION SWITCH CHECK

KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION

Item Standard Value

Item Standard Value

Tool Tool number and Supersession Application

Tool Tool number and Supersession Application

Tool Tool number and Supersession Application

MB992006  Continuity check and voltage

STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC

HOW TO CONNECT THE SCAN TOOL (M.U.T.-III)

HOW TO READ AND ERASE DIAGNOSTIC

NOTE: When the "Loading Option Setup" list is displayed,

HOW TO DIAGNOSE THE CAN BUS LINES

CHECK OF FREEZE FRAME DATA

DTC No. Diagnostic item Reference page

DTC No. Diagnostic item Reference page

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE PROCEDURES

DTC B1200: Odometer failure

TROUBLE JUDGMENT TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

DTC B1201: Fuel information problem

STEP 1. Check of fuel pump and gauge assembly circuit

STEP 2. Check the fuel level sensor.

STEP 3. Resistance measurement at the fuel pump and

STEP 4. Check of open circuit in ground line between fuel

STEP 5. Check of open circuit in F/G line between

STEP 6. Using scan tool (M.U.T.-III), perform actuator test.

STEP 7. Recheck for diagnostic trouble code.

DTC B1209: B1209 Test mode

TROUBLE JUDGMENT TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

DTC B2463: Rheostat switch sticking

TROUBLE JUDGMENT TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

DTC U0100: Engine CAN timeout

CAUTION JUDGMENT CRITERIA